JP2020048798A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To change the number of set values to be used while reducing the burden of rewriting a program.SOLUTION: A game machine according to the present invention includes main control means for controlling progress of a game operation, and performance control means for controlling progress of a performance operation. The main control means includes setting means capable of setting a value on the basis of a predetermined operation, and transmission means capable of transmitting predetermined information to the performance control means. The setting means can set any one of N types of setting values, the transmission means can transmit the set value information regarding the set value set by the setting means to the performance control means, the performance control means includes analysis means capable of analyzing the set value information received from the main control means, and the analysis means can analyze M types of set value information that is larger in number than the N types. The main control means can execute first processing with respect to the progress of the game operation on the basis of the N types of setting values, and the performance control means can execute second processing with respect to the progress of the performance operation on the basis of the M types of set value information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a ball game machine, a torso gaming machine, etc., and in particular, a set value representing a stage regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to a player is used for an operation. The present invention relates to a technical field related to a gaming machine that can be set based on the setting.

For example, various game machines are widely known, such as a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine and a rotary game machine such as a slot machine.
As a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which a set value indicating a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to a player can be set based on an operation.

  In addition, the following patent document 1 can be mentioned as a related prior art.

Japanese Patent No. 5956529

Regarding the set value, it is conceivable that the number that can be used is specified by a rule. For example, it is conceivable to define six levels of setting values “1” to “6” as usable values.
At this time, the number of setting values actually used by the gaming machine can be smaller than the above-mentioned usable number. For example, while the usable number = 6, the number of setting values actually used is set to 3, for example, “1”, “2”, “6” or “1” “3” “6”. is there.

  Further, even if the gaming machines are of the same model, if the specifications are different, it is conceivable that the number of actually used setting values differs. For example, for a gaming machine of the same model “Otsu”, the number of setting values actually used is set to six values of “1” to “6” for the gaming machine of the specification A, and “1” for the gaming machine of the specification B. , "2" and "6".

As described above, for the gaming machine, it is conceivable that the number of actually used setting values differs depending on the specification. At this time, as the operation program of the gaming machine, a different program is prepared for each specification. For example, in the above example, when the program for the specification A is created first, the program for the specification B is created by rewriting the corresponding part of the program of the specification A.
Since the process of using the set value is diversified, rewriting the program at this time imposes a corresponding work load.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a change in the number of setting values to be used while reducing the load of a program rewriting operation.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes main control means for controlling progress of a game operation and effect control means for controlling progress of an effect operation, wherein the main control means is advantageous to a player based on a predetermined operation. Setting means that can set a setting value indicating a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win the game state, and transmitting means that can transmit predetermined information to the effect control means, the setting means , Any one of the set values can be set from among the N types, and the transmitting means is configured to be able to transmit setting value information relating to the set values set by the setting means to the effect control means. The effect control means has an analyzing means capable of analyzing the set value information received from the main control means, and the analyzing means is capable of analyzing M kinds of the set value information more than the N kinds. Wherein the main control means comprises: A first process relating to the progress of the game operation can be executed based on the N types of the set values, and the effect control unit is configured to execute the first operation relating to the progress of the effect operation based on the M types of the set value information. The second processing can be executed.

  Thus, when the number of steps of the set value can be changed, the effect control means can execute the second process relating to the progress of the effect operation up to M steps. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

It is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a game machine as an embodiment concerning the present invention. It is a figure showing composition of a game board of a game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of the gaming machine as embodiment. It is an explanatory view about an example of a prefetch notice effect in an embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main control-side main processing according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process in FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a power supply abnormality check process according to the embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between each determination condition on the operation side when shifting to a setting change process, a RAM clear process, a setting confirmation process, and a backup restoration process, and a value of a W register. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main loop process in FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process in FIG. 5. 11 is a flowchart showing an output management process in FIG. It is the figure which showed the example of the 7-segment decoding table. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship between the segment configuration and the display pattern of the segment in the display unit of the set value. 6 is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process in FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process in FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting value offset conversion table. 6 is a flowchart showing a main loop pre-process in FIG. 5. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main control timer interrupt process according to the embodiment. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a power supply check / backup process in FIG. 18. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a setting error check process in FIG. 18. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol management process in FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 starting port check process in FIG. 21. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process in FIG. 21. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation management process in FIG. 23. 25 is a flowchart showing a jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 24. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit random number determination technique of embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the random number determination table for big hit determination used for big hit random number judgment processing. 25 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern lottery process in FIG. 24. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a loss variation pattern table according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure showing other examples of a hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a common variation pattern table at the time of a setting error of an embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another example of the common variation pattern table at the time of a setting error according to the embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a storage example of a first data table and a second data table in the embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating another example of storage of the first data table and the second data table in the embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a storage area structure in a ROM of a main control unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, and motor data registration information of the embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of sound data registration information according to the embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a main scenario table of an embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a sub-scenario table of an embodiment. It is a flow chart of the production control main processing of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command analysis processing in the effect control of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command corresponding process in the effect control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of the production control timer interruption processing of an embodiment. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of display control timing according to the embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating one display mode of a setting operation history. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting confirmation screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of history display information in the embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram for describing an example of a backup operation of history display information as an embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of an additional process of adding individual history information in history display information. 9 is a flowchart of power-on history information initialization processing according to the embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process for updating history information according to occurrence of a target event of history display. 9 is a flowchart of a history information update process according to the embodiment. 9 is a flowchart of a history display process according to the embodiment. 9 is a flowchart of a history information screen creation process according to the embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating numerical values of setting values that can be expressed in the embodiment. It is a flow chart of left symbol lottery processing of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the left symbol lottery table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for left symbol lottery. It is the flowchart which showed another example of left symbol lottery processing. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a left symbol lottery offset table used in the processing shown in FIG. 60. It is a flow chart of the mini-character announcement lottery processing of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the 1st mini-character announcement lottery table. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first notice offset table. It is the figure which showed the example of the 2nd mini-character announcement lottery table. It is a figure showing the example of the offset table for the 2nd notice. It is a flowchart of the big hit effect lottery process of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the big hit end INT suggestion element table. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a second offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68. It is a flow chart of SU notice lottery processing of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the SU production table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU stage lottery. It is the figure which showed the example of SU3 replacement table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU3 replacement. It is the flowchart which showed another example of SU notice lottery processing. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of an SU3 replacement first offset table and an SU3 replacement second offset table used in the process of FIG. 76. It is explanatory drawing about the lottery aspect example of SU notice effect in embodiment. It is a flowchart of a setting related command process (S2130e) as a first modification. It is a flowchart of the setting related command process (S2130e) as a 2nd modification. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting value conversion table which the production control section uses in the modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Game machine structure>
<2. Game machine control configuration>
[2-1. Main control section]
(About changing the set value)
(About performance display)
(Direction control command)
[2-2. Production control section]
<3. Outline of operation>
[3-1. Design variation display game]
(Special symbol variation display game)
(Decorative design variation display game)
(Normal symbol display game)
(About hold)
[3-2. Game state]
[3-3. About hits]
[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)
(Preliminary production)
(Direction means)
<4. Processing of main control unit>
[4-1. Main control side main processing]
(Initial setting process)
(Processing after initial setting)
(Main loop processing)
(Setting change processing)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(Main loop preprocessing)
(Advantages of the setting value display data table and the setting value conversion table as the embodiment)
[4-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]
(Power check / backup processing)
(Error management and processing for game progress, etc.)
[4-3. Processing related to special symbol variation display game]
(Special symbol management processing)
(Special figure 1 starting port check processing)
(Special symbol change start processing)
(Change management processing)
(Big hit random number judgment processing)
(Variation pattern lottery processing)
(Advantages of the setting value related data table as the embodiment)
<5. Processing of effect control unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. Data Type of Setting Value in Embodiment]
[5-4. Setting suggestion effect]
(Suggested production with left symbol)
(Suggested production by mini-character notice)
(Suggested production by jackpot end production)
(Suggested production by SU notice)
[5-5. Regarding the difference in the set value range corresponding to the main control unit and the production control unit]
<6. Modification>
<7. Summary of Embodiment>
<8. Other variations

<1. Game machine structure>

With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the structure of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment according to the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG.

  A pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a mounted game board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3 a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. Have. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. On the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is changed. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 is released, and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is provided below the glass door 6. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls is formed on the upper tray unit 8.

The upper tray unit 8 also provides a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1 and pays out game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting a return of a valuable medium inserted into the game ball lending device are provided. The upper receiving unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (operation means) configured to be operable by a player. The effect button 13 can be operated (input can be received) by turning on the built-in lamp (button LED 75) during a predetermined input receiving period, and can be operated (pressed, repeatedly pressed, long pressed, etc.) while the built-in lamp is turned on. By doing, it is possible to bring a change to the production.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for a user such as a player or a hall staff to select various items or to give a direction instruction. I have.

  On the right side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided.

  On both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15, there are provided speakers 46 for producing a sound effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, a light effect LED using a full-color LED, etc.) that exert a light effect by decoration of light are provided at appropriate places of the glass door 6. A plurality of full-color LEDs (light effect LEDs) as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko gaming machine, that is, on the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction.

  The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. In the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding a shot game ball is annularly mounted as a board surface dividing member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, The four corners are non-game areas.

  In a substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol change display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently provided. A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 capable of performing a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), a middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and a right symbol (corresponding to the right display area) is provided. Is provided. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, in addition to the variable display operation of the decorative symbols.

  In the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a far winding manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls and to control the flow of the game balls by the strength or stroke length of the game balls. It acts as a flow distribution means that enables the road to be divided into right and left. In the present embodiment, the center decoration 48 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 3a such that the presence of the center decoration 48 forms the flow path of the game ball on both upper sides (left and right) in the game area 3a. ing. The game balls hit by the firing device 32 on the upper side of the game area 3a are distributed right and left on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left and right flowing paths 3b on the left side and the right flowing path 3c on the right side of the center decoration 48 are separated. Either flow down.

  The non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is provided with the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower starting. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variation display game by a variation display operation of "special symbol" represented by a seven-segment display is executed. In the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a timely manner, and the decorations are displayed together with various announcement effects (effect images). The symbol variation display game is executed (the details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In addition, a composite display device (hold composite display LED display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is provided next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in the various function display units. The combination was called the special symbol 1 or 2, the number of balls on hold for the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold, the status notification during the operation of the variable time reduction function (during hours) and the high probability state (high accuracy). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device having a display function (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”).

  Further, the various function display unit is provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (ordinary symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a, an ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by a variation display operation of an ordinary symbol represented by two LEDs. For example, as the variable display operation, the normal symbol by the LED alternately turns on and off alternately in a seesaw manner, and stops when either side is lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol variable display game can be determined. I have. Further, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the ordinary symbol display device 39a is provided. The round number display device 39b notifies the specified round number (maximum round number) of the big hit by the combination of the ON / OFF state of the three LEDs.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 41 is provided on the upper and lower sides, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting port sensor 34a, lower starting port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of them. ing.

  The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is provided with a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1" and the "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a. ), And is configured as a fixed prize rate prize device that does not have a start port opening / closing means (a means for opening or enlarging the start port). In the present embodiment, the left downward flow path 3b is directed to the upper starting port 34 by the action of a game ball falling direction conversion member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down is easy to enter (win), whereas the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c is difficult to enter or cannot enter.

  The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable type winning device capable of changing the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by the opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a so-called “electric tulip” including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can open or expand the lower starting port 35 that is the second special symbol starting port as the starting port opening / closing means. It is configured as a "type" winning device.

  The lower starting port 35 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is a second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as “special symbol 2” and sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol 2”). ) Is a winning port related to the start condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting port 35 is an open state (easy to win) according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. This is converted into a winning state (easy winning state) and a closed state (winning difficult state) in which winning is more difficult than in the open state or winning is impossible. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is not operated, the closed state (winning impossible state) in which it is impossible to win the lower starting port 35 is maintained.

  Also, on both sides of the ordinary variable prize winning device 41, there are provided a total of four general prize openings 43, three on the left side and one on the right side. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the area of the game board, a movable body (not shown) that produces a visual effect is disposed at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball.

  In addition, a diagonally upper right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 41, that is, an upper side from an intermediate portion of the right downflow path 3c, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting) formed of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass. Means) are provided. The normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning port related to a normal symbol changing display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and has a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball therein. Are formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downflow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downflow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left downflow path 3b or may be formed in both the downflow paths.

  In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downflow route 3c, a special variable prize in which the large winning port 50 can be opened or enlarged by a squeezing type opening door 52b can be opened or enlarged. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, inside which is formed a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 50.

  The periphery of the special winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. I have. When the special winning opening 50 is closed by the opening door 52b (the special winning opening closed state), a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 is formed, so that the downstream guiding portion ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in a region above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely, in a game region above the special winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is almost parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to project the flowing game balls in the direction of the special winning opening 50.

The process of entering a game ball into the special winning opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is projected on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d projecting from the game board 3 surface, whereby the flowing direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the special winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the protruding and retracting type open door 52b (the special winning opening closed state), the game ball rolls over the special winning opening 50 and further has a predetermined arrangement (not shown). The game nail is guided in the direction of the tulip-type ordinary variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winable state (starting port opened state), a game ball can win the lower starting port 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (the special winning opening is open), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the firing position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when aiming the game ball to pass the right-downflow path 3c), the upper starting port. The configuration is such that game balls are hardly guided or not guided on the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is operated. The movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is more advantageous than the normal state in a game state accompanied by an electric support state described later.

  In the case of the present embodiment, how the player hits an advantageous situation changes according to the game state. Specifically, if the game state is accompanied by the later-described “electric support-less state”, “left-handed” aiming for the game ball to pass through the left downflow path 3b is considered to be advantageous. If the game state is accompanied by the "present state", "right strike", which aims to allow the game ball to pass through the right downflow path 3c, is advantageous.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if a winning is made to a winning opening other than the ordinary symbol starting opening 37 among the various winning openings provided in the gaming area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, 13 for the large winning port 50, and 10 for the general winning port 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3). See)). The game balls that do not win the above winning ports are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out ports 49.
Here, the "winning" means that the winning opening captures a game ball therein, or a winning opening formed of a pass-through gate instead of a structure in which the winning ball captures a game ball therein (for example, the normal symbol starting port 37). Means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when a game ball is actually detected by each of the winning detection switches formed for each winning port, a "win" is generated in the winning port. It is treated as having done. The game balls related to the winning are also referred to as “winning balls”. If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Unless otherwise specified in this specification, it is determined whether the game ball is detected by the winning detection switch. Regardless of this, it may be referred to as "winning" including the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Game machine control configuration>

With reference to the block diagram of FIG. 3, a configuration (control configuration) for realizing the gaming operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be described.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as a “main control unit 20”) that comprehensively controls a game operation control (game operation control), and a main control unit. An effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control unit 24”) that receives the effect control command from 20 and controls the execution of the effect by the effect means (presentation control), and a prize ball. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 for performing payout control of the game machine; a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) for generating and supplying necessary power to the gaming machine 1 from an external power supply (not shown); Is configured.
The effect control unit 24 is connected to a liquid crystal control unit 40 that performs display driving on a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device. The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes, for example, a microcontroller mounted on a substrate different from various substrates such as the main control board (main control unit) 20, the effect control board (effect control unit) 24, the payout control board 29, and the power supply board. It has a computer.
In FIG. 3, power supply routes to the respective units are omitted.

[2-1. Main control section]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU) built therein. A ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storing, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and a buffer memory are mounted to constitute a microcomputer as a whole. .

  Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) of a fixed period, a time measurement function, and a CPU 201. An interrupt controller circuit that performs interrupt enable / disable functions such as timer interrupts that provide an interrupt signal, and can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU 201 upon detection of power-on, power-off, power failure, etc. Reset circuit, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit for monitoring the operation abnormality of the control program, and an out-of-designation area prohibition (IAT) circuit for monitoring whether or not the program is correctly executed within a preset address range. And a counter circuit for generating a random number within a certain range in terms of hardware.

  The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number, and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (size of random number: 65536)). , And use the random number value for the jackpot lottery. The random number for internal lottery is obtained by adding a soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number value in order to prevent a hit action such as hitting and hitting.

  The main control unit 20 includes an upper starting opening sensor 34a for detecting a winning (ball entry) to the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening sensor 35a for detecting a winning to the lower starting opening 35, and a normal symbol starting opening 37. , A regular winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning in the special winning opening 50, a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning in the general winning opening 43, and an out opening 49. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) discharged from the device is connected, and the main control unit 20 is capable of receiving a detection signal output from these. The main control unit 20 can grasp which winning opening the game ball has entered based on the detection signal from each sensor.

  The main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a special winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the special winning opening 50. Are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling these.

  Further, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display of the special symbols 1 and 2. . Furthermore, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20 so that a control signal for controlling display of the normal symbols can be transmitted.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to the composite display device 38c and the number-of-rounds display device 39b. The main control unit 20 performs control signals for controlling display of various information displayed on the composite display device 38c. It is possible to transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the specified number of rounds due to the jackpot displayed on the number display device 39b.

Further, an external centralized terminal board 21 for a frame is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 transmits a predetermined signal to a hall computer HC provided outside the gaming machine via the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, big hit information, prize ball number information, symbol change execution information, etc.).
Note that the hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control unit 20 and managing the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko hall in an integrated manner.

  Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20. When it is necessary to pay out the prize balls, the payout control board 29 is controlled with respect to the payout control command (the number of prize balls). Can be transmitted.

  To the payout control board 29, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launching device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out game balls are connected. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmit a state signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. It is.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with an out-of-supply detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls to be paid out (prize balls). Can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls. The payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. Can be transmitted.

  Further, the payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9) for detecting that the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. , A front door opening sensor 61 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects at least the open state of the front frame 2).

  The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the front door open sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. The state signal includes a ball clogging signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is open, a supply replenishment signal indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball dispensing device 19, and a prize ball. , A count error signal indicating that an error has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and the like, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these state signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 is open (door open error), whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (out of supply error), and whether the upper tray 9 Monitors the full state (ball clogging error).

Further, a firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a permission signal for permitting the firing to the firing control board 28 can be transmitted. The firing control board 28 controls the energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the payout control board 29, and operates the firing operation handle 15. To launch the game ball. Specifically, when the firing permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (the firing permission signal is ON), the player touches the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15. Is detected, and the firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the firing permission signal is not output (the firing permission signal is OFF), the firing operation is not executed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Further, the strength of the launch of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the firing operation handle 15.
When the payout control board 29 detects the above-described ball clogging error, it sends a ball clogging signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (the firing permission signal is OFF). Is controlled so as to stop the launching operation until the full state of is released.
The payout control board 29 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 on condition that the main controller 20 instructs the firing permission.

  Here, the main control unit 20 is connected to a setting key switch 94 and a RAM clear switch 98, and can receive a detection signal from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (at the time of ON operation) by inserting a setting key possessed by the hall staff and turning on / off when the power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the set value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value indicating a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON / OFF in response to the operation of a RAM clear button operably provided with the front frame 2 opened. The setting key switch 98 is provided with a key cylinder in which the above-mentioned setting key can be inserted and withdrawn. The setting key switch 98 is turned on when the setting key inserted in the key cylinder is rotated in the forward direction. It is turned off by being turned in the opposite direction from the ON state. The key cylinder is provided so that operation by inserting a setting key is possible with the front frame 2 opened. The key cylinder functions as an operation element that can be operated by inserting the setting key.

  In this example, the RAM clear button is also used for changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially moving the set value Ve.

  The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate places inside the gaming machine 1. For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20.

The main control unit 20 is connected to a setting / performance indicator 97.
The setting / performance display 97 includes, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as a display unit capable of displaying the set value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting / performance indicator 97 is mounted at, for example, a position on the main control unit (main control board) 20 where it is easily visible.
The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying the set value Ve and the performance information to the setting / performance indicator 97.

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least a big hit (a hit type in which a condition device to be described later is activated) for each stage (for example, six stages of settings 1 to 6). The higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability (the setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability increases in the ascending order of the setting value), so that it is advantageous to the player. I have. In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called “mechanism split (payout rate, payout rate)”, which is advantageous for the player.
As described above, the set value Ve is a value that defines a jackpot winning probability, a machine split, and the like, and means a value for a class related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state acting on a player. In the present embodiment, the degree of advantage relating to the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six stages (stages of the degree of advantage) of the set value Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, it is assumed that the usable range (hereinafter referred to as “usable range Re”) of the set value Ve according to the rules is a range of “1” to “6”.
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example uses only some of the set values Ve that can be used on a regular basis. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example uses only three values of, for example, “1”, “2”, and “6” among “1” to “6” that are set values Ve within the usable range Re. I do. In other words, the specification of the winning probability is not limited to six, which is the maximum rule, but is limited to three.
Hereinafter, the range of the set value Ve actually used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, specifically, the range of the set value Ve actually used among the set values Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, "1" , "2" and "6") is referred to as "usage range Ru".

The set value Ve is set exclusively by hall staff such as hall clerks based on the sales strategy of the hall (game store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot probability is changed according to the set value Ve, the type of the target jackpot can be determined as appropriate. For example, assuming that there are three types of jackpots, ie, jackpots 1 to 3, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the probability of winning all the jackpots 1 to 3 or the larger jackpots 1 to 3 The combined winning probability may be increased. The winning probability of some jackpots may be increased. For example, only the winning probability of the big hits 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the big hit 3 may be set to a fixed winning probability with all the set values Ve.

(About changing the set value)

In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the front frame 2 is released, the setting key switch 94 is turned on (operated to the setting change mode side) and The power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current setting value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance display 97, and the mode shifts to the “setting change mode” in which the setting value Ve (1, 2, and 6 in this example) can be changed.

  In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is performed in a main control-side main process described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above-mentioned operation condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for changing the setting is executed according to the condition.

After the shift to the setting change mode, if the RAM clear button functioning as a change operator of the set value Ve is turned ON, the current display value of the setting / performance display 97 is changed from “1 → 2 → 6 → 1 →”. 2 → 6 →... ”In a circulating manner within the use range Ru. When the set key switch 94 is turned off when the desired set value Ve is reached, the set value Ve is determined, and information of the set value Ve is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode ends, and the display of the setting / performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state is shifted to a state in which the game progress is allowed.

(About performance display)

The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for causing the setting / performance display 97 to display predetermined performance information.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to check, such as information on the presence or absence of illegal prize balls, such as excess prize balls, for the gaming machine 1 and information on the original payout performance of the gaming machine 1. It is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player plays the game, unlike the announcement effect or the like.

  Therefore, the setting / performance display 97 is provided inside the gaming machine 1, for example, the main control unit (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the emission control board 28, the relay board, the effect control unit (effect control board (liquid crystal) Control board (including a control board)) 24, a board case (protective cover for protecting the board), etc., at a position where the display information can be visually recognized when the front frame 2 is opened.

  Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payouts paid out by winning in the specific state (the total number of special prize balls: α) is calculated as the total number of out balls discharged from the out port 49 in the specific state (out of the specific state). Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α / β) divided by the number (β) can be adopted as the performance information.
The “total number of payouts” is the total value of game balls (prize balls) paid out when a prize port (upper start port 34, lower start port 35, general prize port 43, large prize port 50) is won. It is. In the case of the present embodiment, there are three upper starting ports 34 or lower starting ports 35, thirteen large winning ports 50, and ten general winning ports 43.
Further, which state is adopted as the specific state can be determined as appropriate according to what kind of state the performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of the present embodiment, any of the normal state, the latent state, the time saving state, the probability change state, and the big hit game can be adopted. Further, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, a normal state and a probable change state, all game states except a hit game, and the like, and the type to be measured can be appropriately determined.
In addition, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability state or a high probability state may be adopted.
In addition, the total payout number obtained by excluding one or more specific winning ports from the measurement target may be used as the total payout number (specific payout port excluded total payout number). For example, of the winning openings, the winning opening 50 that is excluded from the measurement target may be used as the total payout number.

  (2) In addition, only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding the specific winning opening, and the total number of out balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (number of normal payouts) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (number of normal timeouts) are measured in real time, and the number of normal payouts is calculated as the number of normal outs. Is displayed as performance information (hereinafter, referred to as "normal time ratio information"). The display value at this time is a value obtained by rounding off the first decimal place.
Therefore, each data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the normal ratio information is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (specific total total prize ball number storage area, specific medium out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area). It is stored (stored). However, the performance information is not displayed simply by measuring it permanently, but when the total number of out-balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. The specified number is not the total number of out-balls in the normal state, but the total number of out-balls in all game states (including a hit game) (hereinafter referred to as “all state out-numbers”). The number of all state outs is also measured in real time, and stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (all state out number storage area). Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the specific total prize ball storage area, the specific out-number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the all-state out-number storage area are abbreviated as “measurement information storage area”.

  Then, the normal time ratio information at the end is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (this time normal time ratio information is stored), and thereafter, the measurement information storage area (normal time payout number, normal time out number) And the number of all-out balls are cleared, and then the measurement is started again (measurement of the normal-number payout number, the normal-number out number, the normal-time ratio information, and the total-state out ball count is started). The setting / performance display 97 displays the previous normal ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal ratio information currently being measured. Not only the previous information but also the history before the last time or before (three times before) may be displayed, and the number of times before the information is displayed can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in the case of this example, the set value Ve and the performance information are alternatively displayed on the setting / performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, the setting change and the setting confirmation are performed only at the time of startup at the time of power-on. The set value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed, the performance information is displayed.
Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the set value Ve and the performance information are displayed on a common display, and may employ a configuration in which the display is displayed on separate displays. In that case, the display of the set value Ve and the performance information may be performed in parallel.

(Direction control command)

The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information on the special symbol change display game, information on the error, and the like to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as goto, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and has a configuration of one-way communication in which a signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. Has become.

Here, the effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration including a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and distinguishes MODE and EVENT in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT. Bit 7 is ON and EVENT Bit 7 is OFF. When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and performs the first time after a lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. Is transmitted. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and a second transmission of the strobe signal is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive a command.

[2-2. Production control section]

The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area and a buffer memory). And a microcomputer equipped with an effect control RAM), and an acoustic control unit (sound source IC), an RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, and the like. And controls the overall production operation.
The effect control unit 24 of this example has a memory 244 other than the RAM 243 as a memory from which information can be read and written. The memory 244 is formed of, for example, an SRAM, and is configured to read information by the CPU 241 at a lower speed than the RAM 243. The RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power supply, and cannot store stored information when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. On the other hand, the memory 244 is connected to a backup power supply and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. It is possible to retain the stored information even if it is performed.
The use of the memory 244 will be described later.

  The main role of the effect control unit 24 is to receive an effect control command from the main control unit 20, determine the selection of an effect based on the effect control command, and control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to execute image display. , Sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 75, and other effect LEDs (not shown)), operation control of the movable body (gear), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various memory devices, and controls display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall image output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, and an image storing image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image expansion processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, and a CPU (VRAM) that controls the operation of the VDP based on various instructions (such as a “liquid crystal control command” described later) from the effect control unit 24. A liquid crystal control CPU), a ROM (liquid crystal control ROM) for storing a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, and a RAM (liquid crystal) serving as a work area and a buffer memory. Control RAM).
The liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of the VDP (the display driving operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on the instruction from the effect control unit 24, thereby displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the instruction of the effect control unit 24. Is performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 3 has a CPU for liquid crystal display (CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40) on a separate board from the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24. Such a configuration is generally referred to as a “2 CPU” configuration. On the other hand, the configuration in which a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40 is mounted on the effect control unit 24, that is, the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40 is “1CPU”. It is called.

  The effect control unit 24 also provides a light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs in order to present various effects (light effects, sound effects, and movable body effects using movable bodies). , A sound control unit for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive circuit: driver) for the movable body part motor 80c that operates a movable body (not shown), and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable body object, and the effect control unit 24 determines the current operating position of the movable body object based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). In addition, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable body object is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, this is detected as an error.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to switches of the effect button 13 and the cross key 16, that is, the operation buttons 13 and the operation detection switch of the cross key 16. The effect control unit 24 operates the effect button 13 and the cross key 16. Each of the detection signals can be received.

  Based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 selects (determines) the effect pattern by lottery or uniquely from among a plurality of effect patterns prepared in advance, and Various effect means are controlled at the desired timing to produce the desired effect. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the turning on and off of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern change display operation and "Preliminary productions etc." are developed in chronological order, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense.

Here, for the effect control command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates and executes an interrupt process based on the above-described strobe signal input transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), and performs reception and analysis thereof. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the above-described strobe signal, acquires an effect control command in the interrupt processing realized thereby, and analyzes the command contents. Do.
At this time, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs the process even if an interrupt process based on another interrupt (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) is being executed. And performs command reception interrupt processing. Even if other interrupts occur simultaneously, the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed.

<3. Outline of operation>
[3-1. Design variation display game]

Next, an outline of a gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the above-described control configuration (FIG. 3) will be described.
First, the symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol variation display game)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is operated based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 (wins). , A "big hit lottery" is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. It is derived and displayed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol change display game.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the upper starting port 34 and the jackpot lottering based on the winning in the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on condition that a game ball has entered the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed to start the first special symbol variability display game, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on condition that a game ball has entered the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variance display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game is started on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b, after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined “big hit” In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "missing" mode, whereby a game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol change display game on the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as “special symbol change display game 1”, and the second special symbol change game on the special symbol display device 38b is used. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbols" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbols"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbols". The "special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative design variation display game)

In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, a decorative symbol (a staging game symbol) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a variable manner, thereby starting a decorative symbol variation display game. A variety of effects are developed along with it. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also terminates, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating a jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol change display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning decorative symbol change display game including the decorative symbol change display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol change display game is "big hit" (when the big hit lottery result is "big hit"), an effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol change display game. When the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol indicates a big hit (for example, the display state of 7-segment is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the "big hit" (for example, in each display area of "left", "middle" and "right", three decorative patterns are "7", "7" and "7" Is stopped).

  When this "big hit" is reached, specifically, the special symbol change display game ends, and the decorative symbol change display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of "big hit" is derived and displayed. Thereafter, the special winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the special winning opening 50, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A special game state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b uses the opening time of the special winning opening until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening (the special winning opening). 50 winning prize balls) a predetermined number (maximum winning number: the upper limit of the number of prize balls allowed for the winning port which is opened or enlarged by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9) Until the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed. Round) repeated.

  When the big hit game starts, an opening effect for notifying that the big hit has started is performed first, and after the opening effect ends, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the end of the prescribed number of rounds, an ending effect for notifying that the big hit is to be ended is performed, whereby the big hit game is ended.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-described decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 determines, based on the fact that a game ball has entered (wins) in the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, specifically, On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting port sensor 34a or the lower starting port sensor 35a and a starting condition (a starting condition relating to a special symbol) is established, it is determined whether the game is a "big hit" or a "losing". The 'winning lottery (winning / winning type lottery)' and the big hit type if it is "big hit", and the lottery type if it is "losing" ) '(With one type of loss, it is not necessary to perform a type lottery for the loss, so that the lottery may be omitted), and based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol And winning A special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “special stop symbol”) is determined according to the type.
Then, the main control unit 20 includes, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least variation pattern information of a special symbol (for example, information on a jackpot lottery result and a variation time of the special symbol). It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. Thereby, the basic information required for the decorative symbol change display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, a “decorative design designation command” including information on special stop symbols (symbol lottery result information (information on hit type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the effect variations. It has become.

  The fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol can include information for specifying whether or not a specific notice effect (for example, “reach effect” or “pseudo-sequence effect” described later) has occurred. More specifically, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a “hit variation pattern” in the case of a hit and a “loss variation pattern” in the case of a loss according to the jackpot lottery result. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a “reach fluctuation pattern” that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect described later, a “normal fluctuation pattern” that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect, and the occurrence (duplicate occurrence) of a pseudo continuous effect and a reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as a 'pseudo-represented reach fluctuation pattern' to be specified, and a 'pseudo-represented normal fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of a pseudo-representation and does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time of the reach production and the pseudo continuous production, the fluctuation time for specifying the reach production and the pseudo continuous production is usually longer than the normal fluctuation pattern.

  The effect control unit 24 performs a time-series operation during the decorative design change display game based on information included in the effect control commands (here, the change pattern designating command and the decorative design designating command) sent from the main control unit 20. Decide the contents of the effect to be developed in the game (the effect scenario such as a notice effect) and the decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern. The symbol variation display game is executed. In this manner, the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronization with the display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. Is substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol change display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45, the LED, and the like on the liquid crystal display device 36 are realized.

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the one reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is to be expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. The two symbol display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(Normal symbol display game)

In the gaming machine 1, the main control unit 20 performs a random number lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed (wins) the ordinary symbol starting port 37. Based on the result of the lottery, the ordinary symbol represented by the LED is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 39a in a variable manner, and the normal symbol variation display game is started. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the result is changed to a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “auxiliary hit”, the display section of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are turned on, or “O” and “ The stop display is performed when the LED on the “○” side of the LEDs expressing “x” is turned on).

When the "assistant hit" occurs, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 is opened. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged to be in a state where the game ball easily flows in (starting port opened state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “generic power opening game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general-purpose opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 waits until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or a game in which the lower starting port 35 is won. Until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, four), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the operation of closing the lower starting port 35 is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum). (2 times).

(About hold)

Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the normal symbol variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the open electric game, the upper starting port 34, the lower starting port 35, or the normal symbol starting port 37. When a winning is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, or the ordinary symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is satisfied, This is stored as data relating to the start right of the variable display game, up to a predetermined upper limit of the maximum number of stored memories (for example, up to four), excluding data related to the variable display. On-hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol change display operation or on-hold game data related to the on-hold data is also referred to as “operation-hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation reserve balls to the player, a dedicated reserve display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place of the gaming machine 1 or a reserve display provided as an icon image on a screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Light up the display.

In the present embodiment, up to four operation-holding balls for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 at the maximum, and are held as the number of times the special symbol or the normal symbol is changed. In addition, the maximum storage number (maximum reserved storage number) of the number of operation reserved balls for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or a part of the maximum number of reserved storages of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

[3-2. Game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. To facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, first, various game states will be described.

  The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a latent state, and a probability changing state. These gaming states are distinguished depending on whether a jackpot lottery probability state (low-probability state, high-probability state) or an electric-chu support state (privilege game) has occurred (with or without electric support).

The “electric chu support state” means that the open operation period (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the ordinary fluctuation prize winning device 41 in the open electric game is a normal state. It refers to the "open extended state" which is extended. When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 is extended, for example, from 0.2 seconds in a normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is increased, for example. It is extended from one time at normal time to two or three times.
In the case of the present embodiment, in the electric tuner support state, the lottery probability per assistance changes from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (usually). (Simple symbol fluctuation state) occurs, and a 'normal symbol time-saving state' occurs, which shortens the average time (normal symbol fluctuation display operation time) required for one ordinary symbol fluctuation display game (for example, from 10 seconds). Reduced to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric-chu support state occurs, the open-destination game frequently occurs, and the operation state is improved (high base state) in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the power support state is abbreviated as “with power support”, and the other case is abbreviated as “without power support”.

  In the present embodiment, the “normal state” is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of the jackpot lottery probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and indicates a gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

  The “time reduction state” is a state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation time) is longer than the normal state. The "special symbol time-saving state", which is also shortened, and the gaming state in which the electric chew support state is set. In other words, during the time reduction state, the state is “low probability + with electric support + special symbol time reduction state”.

  The “latent state” is a “special symbol probable state” in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1 / 39.9) that is higher than the low probability, and the gaming state without electric support (high (Probability + no electricity support).

  The “probable change state” refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the latent probability state, but the special symbol time reduction state and the electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probable change state, the state is "high probability + there is an electric support + a special symbol time reduction state".

Regarding the gaming state, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability, if the gaming state is “normal state” or “time saving state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the gaming state becomes “latent state” or “probable change”. In the case of “state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state”. During the big hit, a big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but the big hit lottery probability and the presence or absence of the electric support are set in the same game state as the above-mentioned normal state with a low probability and no electric support.

[3-3. About hits]

Subsequently, the “hit” in the gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot lottery (hit lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of hits. In the case of this example, the hit types include, for example, each of the big hits of “normal 4R”, “normal 6R”, “probable change 6R”, and “probable change 10R” belonging to the big hit type.
In addition, the notation of the above-mentioned "R" means a prescribed round number (maximum round number).

  The big hit type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the `` condition device '' is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the continuous action device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or a game ball is displayed. This is the one that is activated when passing through a specific area within the special winning opening.

The probable change state ends the high-probability state and shifts to the low-probability state when the number of executions of the special symbol change display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the specified ST number) without winning the jackpot type. This is a so-called “number-of-times-variable changing machine (ST machine)”, and when the specified number of STs ends, the game is shifted to the normal state from the next game. However, a "general probability change machine" of a type that continues until the next big hit is won may be used.
Note that the number of times of execution of the special symbol change display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol change display game 1 and the special symbol change display game 2 (total number of changes of the special figures 1 and 2), Any one of the number of executions (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2) may be used. In addition, the number of time reduction states is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be determined as appropriate according to game characteristics. There is no particular limitation on what kind of contact is provided, and it can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for “outside” as well as the big hit type. More specifically, three types of outliers, “outside 1”, “outside 2”, and “outside 3” are provided.
As described above, if the result of the winning lottery is “losing”, a lottery of a different type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)

Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for presenting effects related to a gaming state, and is configured to be able to move between the effect modes. More specifically, a normal effect mode, a time-saving effect mode, a latent effect effect mode, and a probable effect mode are provided corresponding to the normal state, the time-saving state, the latent state, and the probable state, respectively. In each effect mode, the background display as the background of the decorative design change display screen is displayed by different background effects, so that it is possible to grasp what game state the player is currently staying in. It has become.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) converts the specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, to the effect control command including the game state information managed by the main control unit 20 side. Based on the game state, the current game state is grasped in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20, and a transition between a plurality of effect modes can be controlled. The specific effect control commands as described above include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative design designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Preliminary production)

Next, the announcement effect will be described. The effect control unit 24 performs various operations related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least on the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of a “notice effect”. Such a notice effect suggests (notices) the degree of expectation (hereinafter referred to as “winning degree expectation”) as to whether or not the winning type has been won, and as a “fearing effect” for inspiring the player's expectation of winning. work. Representative examples of the notice production include “reach production” and “simulated continuous production”, as well as “read ahead notice production”. The effect control unit 24 functions as a notice effect control means capable of controlling (presenting) these effects.

  The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a reach state (a fluctuation display mode with a reach state: a reach fluctuation pattern). Specifically, a final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. It says a special production mode. The reach effect includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation. For example, there is a case where a winning expectation degree is relatively increased as compared with a case where a normal reach effect appears. Such a reach production is called 'super reach production'. Many of the "super reach" have a longer production time (variation time) than the normal reach in order to increase the expectation of winning. In addition, the normal reach and the super reach include a plurality of types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects of super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of the super reach 1 to 4 is determined as “super reach 1 <super reach 2 <super reach”. Reach 3 <Super Reach 4 ”.

  "Pseudo continuous production" refers to an effect mode involving a pseudo continuous variation display state of a decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation), and "pseudo continuous variation" refers to one of the decorative symbols during a decorative symbol variation display game. A variable display mode in which a display operation such as temporarily suspending a part or all of the parts and performing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporarily stopped state is repeated one or more times. This point is different from the “read ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol change display games. The occurrence rate (appearance rate) of such a “pseudo-run” is basically determined such that the greater the number of pseudo-changes, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, a super- It is easy to select productions to increase expectations such as reach.

  “Pre-reading notice effect” refers to an operation-holding ball (unexecuted operation-holding ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). This is an effect mode in which the winning expectation degree can be notified in advance before the operation-holding ball is used in the symbol change display game, using the background effect of the symbol change display game executed in the above. In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the “reach effect”, various effects such as a so-called “SU (step-up) notice effect”, “timer notice effect”, “resurrection effect”, “premier effect effect”, and the like are provided. Occurs and excites the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of a “suspended change announcement effect” as an example of the above-described prefetch announcement effect.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a display area for displaying a decorative design variable display game (a decorative display variable display effect and a preview effect are displayed in the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36). A display area for displaying the number of operation-reserved balls on the special symbol 1 (hold display areas a1 to d1) and a special symbol are provided in a lower display area in the screen. A hold display area 77 (hold display sections a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation-holding balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation-holding ball, the fact is notified by a predetermined hold display mode. In FIG. 4, the presence / absence of the operation-holding ball is indicated by the lighting state (the operation-holding ball is present: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or the light-off state (the operation-holding ball is not shown: the dashed circle in the figure). An example is shown in which information about the number of active balls is reported.

  The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation pending ball (reservation display) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order). In each of the suspension display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation suspension ball is displayed in all the activations in the suspension display. It is displayed as an operation-holding ball that occurs first on the time axis (that is, the oldest) among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the reserved display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a moving display area 78 for indicating the operation reserved ball currently being used in the special symbol variable display game. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which an icon of the game execution suspension K currently being offered to the game appears on the seat J icon. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is replaced with the game K on hold. As an icon, it moves over the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and its state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation-reserved ball is generated, the main control unit 20 sends the pre-read determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-reserved balls at the time of pre-read determination (the number of existing operation-reserved balls including the operation-retained ball generated this time). Is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of the present embodiment, the hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the hold addition command allows the upper byte side data that can specify the number of operation pending balls at the time of the prefetch determination and the prefetch determination information to be specified. And lower byte data.

Here, as understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that a prize has occurred in the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 and a new reserved ball has been generated, the pre-reading of the reserved ball is performed. As a determination, a jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game relating to the reserved ball is performed. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 holds the information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery performed as the pre-read determination in the relevant storage area of the RAM 203 in a suspended manner.
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of the pre-read determination is used for selecting (lottery) a symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be rephrased as “variation pattern selection information”. Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 performs the pre-reading determination and temporarily stores the “variation pattern selection information” obtained in the predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, based on the look-ahead determination information included therein, the effect control unit 24 performs a “read-ahead notice effect” as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Effect control processing is performed. Specifically, a “read ahead notice lottery” is performed to determine whether or not the look ahead notice effect can be executed, and when this is won, a look ahead notice effect is displayed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is, specifically, a jackpot lottery result (the jackpot lottery result at the start of the change) executed by the main control unit 20 when the operation-holding ball is provided for the symbol change display game. This is game information obtained by pre-reading the change pattern at the start of the change. In other words, this information includes at least information on prefetch determination of the winning lottery result at the start of the change (prefetch hit information), and other information (prefetch symbol information) on the prefetch determination of the symbol lottery result and the fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation. Information (prefetch fluctuation pattern information) that has determined the pattern to be prefetched can be included. What kind of information including the hold addition command to send to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content notified in the pre-reading advance notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the hold addition command includes the prefetching missed information, the prefetched symbol information, and the prefetching variation pattern information.

  In addition, the "look-ahead variation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination at the time of the operation pending ball occurrence is not necessarily the "variation pattern at the start of the variation" itself obtained when the operation pending ball is actually subjected to the variation display operation. There is no. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “Super Reach 1” will be representatively described. In this case, the content designated by the look-ahead variation pattern is called “Super Reach 1”. It is possible to specify not the type of the reach effect itself but the "super reach type" that is the gist of the type.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the pre-fetch notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the prefetch notice is, for example, a normal hold display. "Hold display change" which can change from white in (normal hold display mode) to hold display (special hold display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger pattern (or special color or picture such as rainbow color) in advance notice display A preliminary look-ahead effect (also referred to as a “pending change notice”) of the “system” is performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the hatched operation holding ball of the holding display section b1 is changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of the blue, green, red, and danger patterns of the hold icon means that the winning expectation is high in this order. In particular, the display of the hold icon of the danger pattern has a very high jackpot win expectation. It is a premium hold icon to be displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are presented by the effect means provided in the gaming machine 1. The effect means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exhibiting effect effects by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, touch, etc., and may be a light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device (light display device 45a: Light production means), a sound generation device such as a speaker 46 (sound generation device 46a: sound production means), a production display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device for transmitting a contact pressure to an operator's body, A wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to a player's body and a movable body that exerts a visual effect by operating the wind pressure device are typical examples. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals visually similarly to the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes a non-image-based display device (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type in which an effect is produced by image display, and a device that produces an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<4. Processing of main control unit>

Subsequently, a process performed by the main control unit 20 of the present embodiment will be described. The process of the main control unit 20 mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 5) and a timer interrupt process started by a periodic interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 18). It is comprised including.

[4-1. Main control side main processing]

FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating the main control-side main processing.
The main control side main processing is started when a system reset is generated by a system reset signal from the power supply board at the time of recovery from a power failure state or power supply abnormality, or the watchdog timer function ( WDT) is exerted and the CPU 201 is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first performs an initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation, such as initial setting of the registers of the respective units including the CPU 201. (Step S101).

(Initial setting process)

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process in step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above-described system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then, as a stack pointer setting process in step S202, stores the value of the stack pointer in the RAM 203 in the stack area. Is performed in accordance with the last address of. Then, in the following step S203, a process of invalidating the RAM protection and invalidating the prohibited area in the out-of-designated area prohibition function of the RAM 203 is performed.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes processing for turning off the security signal, setting value display, and firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the frame external centralized terminal board 21 and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a status change or the like. Setting value display OFF means that the display of the setting value Ve on the setting / performance display 97 is turned off.
The launch permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the launch control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 instructs the payout control board 29 to turn off the launch permission signal.
Here, the security signal OFF and the setting value display OFF are measures for turning on / off the power during setting change. That is, since the power may be turned off while the setting value Ve is being displayed in the setting change process, the setting value display and the security signal are temporarily turned off.

In step S205 subsequent to step S204, the CPU 201 executes a power failure check process.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power failure check processing, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is ON (step S12). The power supply abnormality signal is a signal output from the power supply board, and indicates that the power supply abnormality signal OFF is at a normal level, and that the power supply abnormality signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, abnormal). If the power failure signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5 and restarts the main processing on the main control side from the beginning. That is, when an abnormality is recognized in the power supply, the main control-side main processing is reset.
Then, unless the power supply abnormality signal is ON, no abnormality is recognized in the power supply, and thus the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check processing.

  Returning to FIG. 6, in response to the completion of the power failure check processing in step S205, the CPU 201 performs various setting processing at startup in step S206. In the setting process of step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hard random number setting process for starting an internal hard random number circuit, and the like are executed.

  In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the activation waiting time of the sub-control board (production control unit 24). Then, by the processing of steps S208 to S210, it waits for the set startup waiting time to elapse. Specifically, the set startup waiting time is decremented by 1 (step S208), and after executing the power failure check processing (step S209), the startup waiting time is not zero (step S210: $ 0). Return to the processing of. By the standby processing based on the activation waiting time, the activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed.

In step S210, when the above-described activation waiting time has elapsed (waiting time = 0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S211 and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control unit 24.
In response to the standby screen display command, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display, on the liquid crystal display device 36, a predetermined screen display determined at the time of startup, such as a screen on which characters such as “Please Wait ...” are arranged. Performs control for execution.

In response to the execution of the transmission process in step S211, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S212, and executes the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. 7) by performing the processes in steps S212 and S213. It waits for a power-on signal from the board 29 to be sent. This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 starts up normally, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. As a result, when the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, only the processing of steps S212 and S213 is repeated, and the game operation is not started. Therefore, for example, a payout abnormality such as a prize ball not being paid out does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from having a mistrust.
When the above-mentioned power-on signal is sent (step S213: ON), the CPU 201 ends the initial setting process of step S101.

(Processing after initial setting)

The CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG. 5 in response to the completion of the above-described initialization processing.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires information on the input port n (that is, a predetermined input port) and copies the information to the W register.
Here, the input port n is a port of 1 byte (8 bits), and in this example, the following signals are input. Note that “b0” to “b7” shown below indicate bit positions.

b0: Setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: Replenishment detection signal b2: Count error signal b3: Disconnection detection signal 1
b4: disconnection detection signal 2
b5: Door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal

Here, as for the setting key of b0, “0” means setting key switch 94 = OFF, and “1” means setting key switch 94 = ON. As for the door open signal of b5, "0" means door closed (front frame 2 is closed) and "1" means door open. Further, as for the RAM clear button b6, "0" means the RAM clear switch 98 = OFF (button not operated), and "1" means the RAM clear switch 98 = ON (button operated state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, the values required for performing the transition determination of the setting change processing (S115), the RAM clear processing (at least S117 and S118), the setting confirmation processing (S109), and the backup restoration processing (S111) described below. Is performed to mask values other than the setting key (b0), the RAM clear button (b6), and the door open signal (b5).
As can be understood from the above description, the condition for shifting to the setting change process is that at the time of startup, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state with the front frame 2 opened. ing.
In this example, the condition for shifting to the RAM clear processing is that, in terms of operation, the setting key is not operated and the RAM clear button is operated at startup.
The condition for shifting to the setting confirmation process is that, in terms of operation, the setting key is operated and the RAM clear button is not operated when the front frame 2 is open.
Further, the condition for shifting to the backup restoration process is that, in terms of operation, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are not operated at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows a correspondence relationship between each determination condition on the operation side when shifting to the setting change processing, the RAM clear processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the backup restoration processing, and the value of the W register.
FIG. 8 shows the order of the setting change processing, the RAM clear processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the transition determination to the backup restoration processing.
As shown in the figure, the determination of the transition to the first setting change process is as follows: the determination conditions are as follows: setting key: ON (setting key switch 94: ON), door opening: ON (front door opening sensor 61: ON), RAM clear switch 98 : ON, so that the value of the W register is 0 bit: 1st, 5th bit: 1 and 6th bit: 1 as conditions.
The determination of the transition to the second RAM clear processing is to determine whether the determination condition is that the RAM clear switch 98 is ON and the value of the W register is the sixth bit: 1 or not. Here, in the present example, the transition determination to the RAM clear processing is executed when the transition condition of the setting change processing is not satisfied. In addition, in transition to the setting confirmation processing and the backup restoration processing, the RAM clear switch 98 must be turned off. From these points, if the transition condition to the setting change process is not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the transition operation to the RAM clear process has been performed. For this reason, in this example, in the transition determination to the RAM clear processing as described above, only the determination as to whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (sixth bit: 1 or not) is made in terms of operation. And

In the determination of the transition to the third setting confirmation processing, the determination conditions are that the setting key is ON, the door is open: ON, and the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF. : The first and sixth bits: 0 are required.
Further, in the determination of the transition to the fourth backup restoration process, the determination condition is that the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF. Condition.

  Here, regarding the backup restoration process, as a transition condition for performing only the backup restoration process without passing the setting confirmation process, the setting key: OFF and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF are described on the operation surface as described above. However, as a condition for whether or not to simply shift to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation process is performed, a condition that a backup flag described later is ON is a condition (step S106). See the determination process of

The description returns to FIG.
The CPU 201 executes setting change condition satisfaction determination processing in step S104 in response to performing the mask processing in step S103. Specifically, in order to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not the value (3 bits) after masking in step S103 is “111”.
When the masked value is “111” and a positive result is obtained that the setting change condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process of step S115. That is, a process for newly setting the set value Ve according to the operation of the RAM clear button or the setting key is performed.
The details of the setting change process in step S115 will be described later.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the detection signals by the setting key switch 94, the front door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, each detection used in performing the transition determination to the setting change mode. The signals are input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and it is determined collectively whether or not the value of each input detection signal is a value satisfying a predetermined condition.
As a result, the number of determination processes can be reduced as compared with the case of individually determining whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition in the determination of transition to the setting change mode.

  In response to executing the setting change process in step S115, the CPU 201 executes a RAM clear process in step S116. This RAM clearing process is a process for initializing a value in a predetermined area (used area) including a work area in the RAM 203 and a setting for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. This includes a change end command transmission process, but details will be described later.

Subsequently, in the previous step S104, if the value after the mask in step S103 is not “111” and a negative result is obtained that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 and proceeds to step S105. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined at least whether or not the “set value” stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the use range Ru (in this example, outside the range of “1”, “2”, and “6”). I do.
Here, as a value handled by the CPU 201 with respect to the set value Ve, there is a set value Vd. The set value Vd is a value corresponding to the set value Ve. In this example, the set value Vd is a one-byte value, and 00H is set so that at least three levels corresponding to the use range Ru described above can be expressed. Values of (0) to 02H (3) are defined. Note that "H" means a hexadecimal number (the same applies hereinafter). In this example, the set value Vd = 00H indicates the set value Ve = “1”, the set value Vd = 01H indicates the set value Ve = “2”, and the set value Vd = 02H indicates the set value Ve = “6”. It is assumed. In the main control unit 20, the set value Vd is mainly handled as the "set value", and the set value Vd is stored in the storage area of the "set value" in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 20. .
In the determination processing of step S105, it is determined whether or not the set value Vd stored in the work area is a value in a range from 00H to 02H.

If it is determined in step S105 that the set value is outside the above-mentioned use range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and that the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 waits for the power to be turned on again after step S112. Later.
More specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201 performs a command transmission process at the time of power-on, as an instruction control command (setting) for instructing that notification to prompt power-on and pagination change of the pachinko gaming machine 1 be performed. A process of transmitting a change waiting command) to the effect control unit 24 is performed. If a RAM abnormality is detected at the time of startup, the mode is forcibly shifted to the setting change mode and a change (setting) of the set value Ve is accepted. For this reason, first, in step S112, the CPU 201 notifies the effect control unit 24 of a transition to the setting change mode by a setting change waiting command.
Upon receiving the setting change waiting command, the effect control unit 24 executes a screen display for prompting the setting change operation on the liquid crystal display device 36, such as a screen including characters such as "Please open the door and change the setting". Let it. At this time, the effect control unit 24 may perform control to cause the corresponding light effect (for example, all LEDs on the light display device 45a to be lit) or sound effect together with the screen display.

  In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and then repeats the error display processing in step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting / performance display 97 to display an error is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes after step S101 are executed again as the main control-side main process. At this time, if the operation of shifting to the setting change mode is performed according to the screen display or the like, the shift to the setting change mode is performed, and the RAM abnormal state is eliminated.

If it is determined in step S105 that the set value is not a value outside the use range Ru and the RAM is not abnormal, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S106 to determine whether the backup flag is ON (in this example, the backup flag = 5AH). Is ON).
In the gaming machine 1, when the power is turned off, a process for backing up information stored in the RAM 203 is performed by a power supply check / backup process (step S901, see FIG. 19) described later in the main control timer interrupt process. If the backup processing is properly performed when the power is turned off, the backup flag is turned on (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in the above step S106, the backup flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the backup can be restored. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether the backup flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

  If it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S112 described above. As a result, when the backup restoration condition is not satisfied, the mode is forcibly shifted to the setting change mode as in the case where the above-described RAM abnormality is recognized.

  Here, as described above, the determination process of step S106 corresponds to a process of determining whether or not a transition to a state in which the backup restoration process is performed is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when determining in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether a RAM clear condition (condition for transition to RAM clear processing) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the sixth bit of the W register is “1”.
When the value of the sixth bit of the W register is “1” and a positive result is obtained that the RAM clear condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S116 described above. Thereby, the above-described RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from step S107 to step S116, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing the settings. Thereby, it is possible to cope with a case where it is desired to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as the data of the payout relationship in the RAM 203.

If the value of the sixth bit of the W register is not “1” in step S107 and a negative result indicating that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 to set the setting confirmation condition ( It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation process) is satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the W register after masking in step S103 is “110”.
If the value of the W register after masking is “110” and a positive result is obtained that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process of step S109, and proceeds to step S110. That is, the process shifts to a process for restoring the backup.
The details of the setting confirmation processing in step S109 will be described again.

  On the other hand, if a negative result indicating that the value of the W register after masking is not “110” and the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 passes the setting confirmation processing of step S109 and proceeds to step S110. .

  In step S110, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined effect control command corresponding to the time of backup restoration to the effect control unit 24 as a command transmission process at the time of backup restoration.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs a backup restoration process.
The backup restoration process is a process of restoring the operation before the power is turned off after the power is turned on, based on the stored contents of the RAM 203 backed up when the power is turned off. Specifically, the CPU 201 restores the stack pointer before the power is turned off, and performs a process for starting the game operation from the processing state at the time of the power cut.
In the backup restoration process, a power failure restoration display command (OB03H) for giving an information display instruction corresponding to the case where the backup is restored is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in the main loop pre-processing of step S119 described later. To this end, a process of storing the lower byte data of the power failure recovery display command in the register is executed.

  When the backup restoration process in step S111 is performed, or when the RAM clear process in step S116 is performed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are performed, or when only the RAM clear process is performed) , The CPU 201 advances the process of step S117.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets a CTC for periodically generating a timer interrupt every predetermined time such as 4 ms.
By performing the setting processing in step S117, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output thereafter, and the main control timer interrupt processing is executed.

In the following step S118, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command for instructing the start of the game to the effect control unit 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S119 to execute the main loop pre-processing, and then executes step S120. The main loop processing of is executed.
The main loop pre-processing of step S119 will be described later.

(Main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing in step S120.
In the main loop process of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes a random number update process in subsequent step S602. In this random number updating process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game (the random numbers related to the jackpot lottery circulating in a predetermined numerical range by the increment process (the special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery) Random number used for changing the initial value (starting value) of the random number for the auxiliary winning lottery (random number for determining the auxiliary hit used in the winning lottery per auxiliary) (initial random number for special symbol determination) , An auxiliary random number for initial determination of hitting, and a variation pattern random number used for selecting a variation pattern.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as various kinds of random number counters used for the symbol lottery related to the big hit lottery, the auxiliary hit lottery, or the variation pattern lottery, a counter for generating an initial value of a special symbol determination random number counter, a special symbol determination There are provided a random number counter for use, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining an auxiliary hit, a random number counter for determining an auxiliary hit, a random number counter for a variation pattern, and the like. These counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. In the random number updating process in step S602, two initial value generation counters for generating the initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a variation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate a soft random number for. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number counter for the variation pattern is “0 to 238”, a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating the value of the random number for the variation pattern in the RAM 203, and the acquired value is After adding “1”, the count value is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding “1” to the obtained value is “239”, “0” is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated.

After finishing the random number updating process in step S602, the CPU 201 performs a process of saving the values of all registers in step S603, and then performs a performance display monitor totalization division process in step S604.
This performance display monitor tallying / dividing process is a process of calculating the value as the above-described performance information (here, for example, the value as the above-mentioned “normal time ratio information”). As described above, the value of the normal time ratio information is calculated by using the total number of payouts and the total number of out-balls. It is calculated based on the result of counting the number of game balls that have won the lower starting port 35, the general winning port 43, and the special winning port 50). We ask by counting.
The counting of the number of winning balls and the counting of out balls are performed in an input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18) described later in the main control timer interrupt process. The CPU 201 calculates a value as normal time ratio information in step S604 based on the count values of the winning ball count and the out ball count performed on the timer interrupt processing side. As described above, the calculated value as the normal ratio information is stored in the predetermined area (the measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203.
The value of the normal ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting / performance display unit 97 by a performance display monitor display process (see step S916 in FIG. 18) described later in the main control timer interrupt process.

  In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs all register return processing, sets itself to an interrupt permitted state in step S606, and returns to step S601.

Thus, in the main loop processing of step S123, the processing of steps S601 to S606 is repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S601 to S606 except during the execution of the timer interrupt processing which is executed intermittently.

(Setting change processing)

FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process in step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the setting value Ve based on the operation, and an effect control command for notifying that the setting change is being performed or that the setting change has been completed (completed) are sent to the effect control unit 24. Processing for transmission is performed.

10, first, the CPU 201 executes a process of transmitting a setting change command (BA76H) to the effect control unit 24 in step S401.
In response to the setting change command, the effect control unit 24 displays on the liquid crystal display device 36 a screen display for notifying that the setting is being changed, such as a screen on which characters such as “setting is being changed” are arranged. Then, a process for causing the speaker 46 to output a sound corresponding to the setting change from the speaker 46 is performed. Further, at this time, the effect control unit 24 may light predetermined LEDs (for example, all the LEDs) in the light generating means (light display device 45a) according to a predetermined lighting pattern.
The processing executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to various effect control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 relating to the setting change, including the setting change command, will be described later (FIG. 52A and the like).

In subsequent step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, the OFF state), and then sets the system operation status to 2 in step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the setting has been passed through the setting change process in step S115 at the time of startup, and “2” indicates that the setting has been passed, and other than “2”. It indicates that the value (for example, “0”) has not passed through the setting change process.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in this example, the RAM changes between the case where both the setting change process and the RAM clear process (S116) are executed, and the case where only the RAM clear process is executed without executing the setting change process. Although the clearing process (program) is shared, by using the above-mentioned system operation status, it is possible to separately execute the process in the former case and the latter case while sharing the RAM clearing program. .

  In step S404 following step S403, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring a set value. Specifically, the setting value Vd (any one of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired.

In the processing of step S405 and subsequent steps following step S404, the display value on the setting / performance display 97 is updated according to the forward operation of the set value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), or the operation of completing the setting change (operation of the setting key). This is a process for setting the set value Ve according to (operation).
First, in step S405, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired set value Vd by 1 ("set value-1"), and determines in step S406 whether the set value Vd is greater than 1 (set value> 1). ). In this example, since the maximum value of the setting value Vd is 02H, it is not determined that the setting value> 1 in step S406 executed for the first time after the start of the setting change process.
If the set value Vd is not larger than 1 in step S406, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag in step S407 (turns it ON), and then increments the set value Vd by 1 (“set value + 1”) in step S408. Then, it is determined in step S409 whether the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes a setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 by the command processing in step S412.
The setting change command will be described later.
Then, in response to executing the command transmission processing of step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management processing of step S413. With this output management process, the setting / performance display 97 displays the set value Ve corresponding to the current set value Vd. The details of the output management process in step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether the setting key is OFF, that is, whether the setting key switch 94 is OFF. If the setting key is not OFF, the CPU 201 determines in step S415 that the change switch, It is determined whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 executes the output management process of step S413 again.
By the processing of steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until one of the setting key and the change switch is turned on, and during the waiting, displays the current setting value Ve on the setting / performance display 97 by the processing of step S413. Process is repeated.

If the change switch is ON in step S415, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
Here, if the setting value Vd obtained at the start of the setting change process in step S115 (the setting value Vd which was being set up to that point) is 02H, it is determined in step S415 that the change switch is ON. In the process of step S406 executed accordingly, a determination result that “set value> 1” is obtained (because −1 is added in step S405 but +1 is added in step S408). The setting value Vd should be returned to 00H in response to a change operation (forward operation) performed with the setting value Vd being 02H. Therefore, if it is determined that “set value> 1” in step S406, the carry flag setting process in step S407 is passed, and the process proceeds to step S408. Accordingly, the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, and the process proceeds to step S410 to return the set value Vd to 00H (“set value ← 0”).
In response to returning the set value Vd to 00H in step S410, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S413 via the processes in steps S411 and S412. That is, in this case, the set value Ve (“1” in this example) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is displayed on the setting / performance display 97.

  According to the above processing, during the setting change, the set value Vd is changed cyclically within the range of 00H to 02H (within the use range Ru) according to the change operation, and corresponds to the changed set value Vd. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance display 97.

The setting change command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the selected setting value Vd during the setting change processing. This is a command in which information indicating Ve is stored.
As a result of the above-described series of steps S406 to S415, each time the set value Ve being selected is switched by the forward operation of the set value, a setting change command reflecting the changed set value Ve is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Will be.
Although not shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 201 uses a setting value offset conversion table described later (see FIG. 16) when acquiring the setting value Ve corresponding to the setting value Vd.

If it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 to execute a process of storing the set value Vd. That is, a process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 ends the setting change process in step S115 in response to executing the save process in step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the output management process in step S413.
First, in step S501, the CPU 201 executes a security signal output process. Specifically, a process for outputting a security signal to the hall computer HC through the frame external centralized terminal board 21 is performed.
In the subsequent step S502, the CPU 201 executes a process of outputting 0 to the LED common port, that is, the common port of the LED as the setting / performance indicator 97, and acquires display data from the 7-segment decoding table in step S503. Execute the process. That is, this is processing for acquiring display data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “6”) based on the set value Vd.
Note that when 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting / performance indicator 97 is in the display OFF state (non-display state), and its significance will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the 7-segment decoding table, and FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the segment configuration and the segment display pattern in the setting / performance display 97.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.

In this example, seven segments in the setting / performance indicator 97 are numbered by numerical values from 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. The setting / performance display 97 is also provided with a display unit (light-emitting unit) of DP (dot point) along with these seven segments 0 to 6, and the display unit of the DP is numbered "7". ing.
As the display data of the seven segments, a total of ten pieces of data from the display data of “SEG_0” representing the numerical value “0” to the display data of “SEG_9” representing the numerical value “9” are prepared. The display data is 1-byte (8-bit) data. If the least significant bit position is the first bit position, the first bit position is display / non-display (light emission / non-light emission) of the segment “0”. Represents Thereafter, similarly, the second bit position is segment “1”, the third bit position is segment “2”, the fourth bit position is segment “3”, the fifth bit position is segment “4”, and the sixth bit position is segment “4”. Indicates the display / non-display of the segment “5”, and the seventh bit position indicates the display / non-display of the segment “6”.
In the display data in this example, the eighth bit position indicates display / non-display of DP (“7”).

The 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is configured so that display data corresponding to each of the set values Vd = 00H, 01H, and 02H, specifically, display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, and SEG_6 is obtained. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, an area for storing display data for at least each set value Vd of 00H to 05H is secured, such as the address areas “6203” to “6208” in the figure. The display data SEG_1 (“06” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is stored in the second area in the uppermost layer area (the area with the lowest numbered address) in this area. Display data SEG_2 (“5B” in the figure) corresponding to Vd = 01H and display data SEG_6 (“7D” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 02H are stored in the third area.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 03H, the fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 05H include a display area. Although "00" is stored as data, its significance will be described again.
Further, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, display data SEG_E (“79”) for displaying “E” indicating a setting value error is stored in the seventh area. When the set value Vd indicates an abnormal value, for example, when the set value Vd is out of the range of use Ru, the set value error can be notified through the setting / performance indicator 97 in response to the case where the set value Vd indicates an abnormal value. .

The description returns to FIG.
The CPU 201 performs a process of outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table by the process of step S503 to the setting / performance display 97 in step S504.
The processing of the subsequent steps S505 to S508 is processing for dynamically lighting (intermittently lighting) the display LED of the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97. Specifically, in step S505, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by one, and determines in step S506 whether the 0th and 1st bits (lower 2 bits) of the LED counter are “11”. Here, the lower two bits of the LED counter become “11” when the increment processing in step S505 is performed by a multiple of four.
If the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are “11” in step S506, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs data designating the segment for displaying the set value to the LED common port, and outputs the data for display in step S508. Execute the timer count process. By executing the output processing in step S507, the setting / performance display 97 displays the set value Ve based on the display data output in step S504. This display state is continued for the time of the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 ends in response to execution of the process of step S509 following the timer count process of step S508, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. If the change switch is ON, the output management processing of step S413 is repeated. As described above, since 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the lighting state of the set value display LED started in the process of step S507 is released by executing step S502. Since the LED counter is incremented by 1 in step S505, it is determined in step S506 that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11", the output process in step S507 is passed, and the timer count process in step S508 is performed. Be executed. In other words, after the process of step S507 is executed and the LED for setting value display is turned on for at least 4 ms, until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter become “11” again, that is, in this example, The LED is turned off for at least 4 ms × 3 = 12 ms.
In this way, dynamic lighting in which the set value display LED is intermittently turned on at a predetermined cycle is realized.

In FIG. 11, in response to executing the timer count process of step S508, the CPU 201 executes an input data creation process in step S509.
This input data creation processing is executed by, for example, calling up the same processing in step S902 in the main control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18). As will be described later, the input data created in the input data creation process includes input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating whether a forward operation of the set value Ve has been performed, and setting key switches indicating whether an operation of completing the setting change has been performed. 94 input data are included.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 10, the determination as to whether or not there is an operation to complete the setting change (S414) and the determination as to whether or not there is an operation to sequentially advance the setting value Ve (S415) are executed after the output management processing in step S413. By executing the input data creation processing in step S509, data required for these determination processings is obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clear processing shown in FIG.
First, in step S601, the CPU 201 executes an in-area RAM initialization process. The initialization processing in step S601 is processing for initializing (clearing) a value in a predetermined area (used area) including a work area in the RAM 203. However, in the initialization processing in step S601, the storage area of the set value Vd in the work area is not targeted for initialization.

The performance information described above is stored in an area outside the used area in the RAM 203, and therefore is not cleared by the initialization processing in step S601.
What is cleared in the RAM clearing process is data of various flags and a RAM area (normal data storage area) such as a timer and a counter required during normal game progress. These data include, for example, the following. That is, data relating to the specification of the game state (game state flags for specifying the current game state such as a normal state, a probable change state, a time saving state, a latent state, etc.), and a flag for specifying whether or not a hit game is being performed (condition device) Operation flag), various data relating to the execution of the hit game (current round number, maximum round number, etc.), data relating to the jackpot lottery result (big hit determination flag: hit lottery result information, special symbol determination data: symbol lottery result information) , Management of the holding data (number of holding balls, various random numbers used for the jackpot lottery, various random numbers used for the lottery per auxiliary, random numbers for the variation pattern), the special symbol operation status, and the game progress Timer (special pattern character operation timer), input / output data related to switches and sensors, various prize counters that count the number of prize balls in the prize hole, electric support Flag (open extension flag) to specify the presence / absence of an electric power supply, a power support counter that counts the remaining number of power support, a counter that counts the remaining number of high-probability states (special-figure probability variation counter, general-purpose probability variation counter), various types An error flag (excluding a RAM error flag), payout-related data, and the like. In any case, when the RAM clear processing is executed, all data other than specific data (set value Vd and performance information) is set to an initial state.

Here, as understood from the description of FIG. 5, when the setting change process (S115) is performed, the process proceeds to step S116, and the RAM clear process is performed.
In the setting change process, the set value Vd can be changed. When the set value Vd is changed, there is a possibility that stored values other than the set value Vd in the work area of the RAM 203 do not match the changed set value Vd. Therefore, when the setting change processing is performed, the area other than the set value Vd in the work area is cleared (initialized) by executing the RAM clear processing.

  In response to the execution of the initialization processing in step S601, the CPU 201 sets 30 s in the RAM clear notification timer in step S602, and executes processing for setting a gap in this special figure. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the time of the RAM clear notification executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to the RAM clear command transmitted in the process of step S803 in FIG. Set. In addition, the present special map referred to here means, for example, the above-described special drawings 1 and 2.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether the above-described system operation status is “2”. That is, it is determined whether or not the process has passed through the setting change process of step S115 after the activation.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes the processing corresponding to the case where the processing has passed the setting change processing in steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 advances the process to step S613, stores the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and ends the RAM clear process of step S116.
The operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as an operation of designating the command type to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop pre-processing (FIG. 17) described later.

  If the processing has passed through the setting change processing, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to “0” in step S604, executes processing for acquiring a setting change end command (BA77H) in step S605, and then executes the command in step S606. The setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the transmission process.

The processing of steps S607 to S612 following step S606 is processing relating to the display of the setting value Ve on the setting / performance display 97.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs data for designating a set value display segment to the LED common port, and in step S608, displays the display data corresponding to the set value Vd from the 7-segment decode table (see FIG. 13). After performing the process of obtaining and adding the DP to the display data in step S609, that is, the process of setting the value of the seventh bit position of the display data to “1”, the display data is output by the output process of step S610. Output to the setting / performance display 97.

  The processing of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 is processing for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting / performance display 97 for a predetermined time (1 s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes the display timer count process of step S612 (for example, the timer count process of a 4 ms cycle similar to the previous step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. I do.

  If it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed, the CPU 201 executes the storage processing in step S613, and ends the RAM clear processing in step S116.

As will be understood from the above description, the setting change process of step S115 is executed, and when the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412: Y in FIG. 10), the RAM clear process of step S116 is executed. A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (S605, S606), and a notification that the setting change has ended is sent.
In the case of this example, the setting change end command notifies the effect control unit 24 that the setting change has been completed, and does not provide the function of notifying the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing. .
In this example, the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing is notified to the effect control unit 24 by a setting value command transmitted in the processing of step S808 in FIG. 17 (main loop pre-processing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing in step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the setting value Ve being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets 30 s to the fraudulent information timer in step S701. The unauthorized information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the security signal to the hole computer HC.
In the following step S702, a process of acquiring current setting value information is performed. That is, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is acquired.

  In step S703 following step S702, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring set value data from the set value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of the set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.
The set value offset conversion table sets the set value Vd (00H to 02H) to the set value Ve (“1
It functions as a table for conversion into identification data (“SETNUM1” to “SETNUM6”) of “2” and “6”.
In the case of this example, the set value offset conversion table has an area for storing the identification data of the set value Ve for each set value Vd of at least 00H to 05H, such as the address areas of “6215” to “6220” in the figure. The identification data (“00” in the figure) of the set value Ve “1” corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is set in the uppermost area in this area, and the set value Vd = 01H is set in the second area. The identification data of the corresponding set value Ve “2” (“01” in the figure) is the third area, and the identification data of the set value Ve “6” corresponding to the set value Vd = 02H (“05” in the figure) is in the third area. Is stored.
In the present example, the set value is set in a fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 03H, a fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 04H, and a sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 05H. “00” is stored as the identification data of Ve, and its significance will be described again.

  In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above identification data as “set value data” by the acquisition processing in step S703.

In response to executing the acquisition process of step S703, the CPU 201 executes an acquisition process of a setting confirmation command (BA6xH) in step S704, and transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S705. Send.
In the acquisition processing of step S704, the CPU 201 performs processing of including the setting value data acquired in step S703, that is, identification data for identifying the setting value Ve being set in the current setting value, in the setting confirmation command.
As a result, by executing the command transmission process of step S705, the effect control unit 24 is notified of the setting being confirmed and the current set value Ve.

The processing of steps S706 and S707 following step S705 is processing for displaying the current set value Ve on the setting / performance display 97.
Specifically, first, in step S706, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring the set value and the DP data. That is, a process of acquiring the current setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) in the setting / performance indicator 97 is executed. Then, the output management processing of step S707 is executed. The output management processing in step S707 is the same as the output management processing in step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the value indicating the current set value Ve and the DP are displayed on the setting / performance indicator 97 in this case.

  In step S708 following step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (the setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether or not an operation to instruct the end of the setting confirmation display has been performed. For example, the output management processing of step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the setting confirmation command is transmitted in step S705, the process waits until the operation of instructing the end of the setting confirmation display is performed by the process of step S708, and the setting / performance is performed by the process of step S707 during the standby. The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display 97 is continuously performed.

If it is determined in step S708 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring a setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and sends a setting confirmation end command to the effect control unit 24 through the command transmission process of step S710. Then, the setting confirmation processing in step S109 is completed.

(Main loop preprocessing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main loop pre-processing of step S119.
In the main loop preprocessing, the CPU 201 first executes an initialization command acquisition process in step S801, and transmits the initialization command to the effect control unit 24 by a command transmission process in step S802. The initialization command is a command for performing an initialization (return to origin) instruction of the movable body part motor 80c that operates the movable body as the accessory.

In step S803 following step S802, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S804.
Here, in the acquisition processing of step S803, the data of the command in which the lower byte data is stored in the register is acquired in the course of the processing that has passed after the activation. More specifically, when the process goes through the RAM clear process of step S116 (when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are performed, or when only the RAM clear process is performed without performing the setting change process), The data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is obtained. On the other hand, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed (when both the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process are performed, or when only the backup restoration process is performed without performing the setting confirmation process), the power failure recovery is performed. The data of the display command (OB03H) is obtained.
This allows the effect control unit 24 to execute different processes when the RAM clear process is performed and when the backup restoration process is performed.

  In step S805 following step S804, the CPU 201 executes a process for transmitting the reserved number of the special figures 1 and 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed, the number of reserves in the special figures 1 and 2 is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the RAM clear process of step S116 is performed. In this case, the transmission of the reserved number is not performed (because the information of the reserved number is cleared).

The processing of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 is processing for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve using a set value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as a process for acquiring the current set value information. The processing for acquiring the set value data from FIG. 16) is executed. Specifically, the identification data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “5”) corresponding to the set value Vd (00H to 02H) obtained in step S806 is obtained.
Then, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring the set value command (F6xxH) in the subsequent step S808, and transmits the set value command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S809.
In the acquisition processing in step S808, a setting value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. With such a set value command, the effect control unit 24 can be notified of the current set value Ve.

  In response to executing the command transmission process in step S809, the CPU 201 executes a process of setting an internal function register in step S810, that is, a register setting process for initial setting of various functions such as a hardware random number counting function. In S811, a process of setting the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5 seconds is executed. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (blinking operation for 5 seconds in this example) when the setting / performance display 97 is activated.

Further, in step S812 following step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to “0”, and turns on the firing permission signal for the payout control board 29 in step S813. In response, the payout control board 29 determines that the state is in the firing permission state, outputs the permission signal to the firing control board 28, and allows the firing device 32 to fire the game ball. Thereby, the launch of the game ball by the launch operation handle 15 becomes possible.
Here, a configuration in which the firing control signal is received from the main control unit 20 by the payout control board 29 to permit the firing operation, that is, the instruction information of the firing permission from the main control unit 20 is indirectly transmitted through the payout control board 29 Although the configuration transmitted to the firing control board 28 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a firing permission signal from the main control unit 20 is directly output to the firing control board 28. .
The CPU 201 ends the main loop pre-processing of step S119 in response to executing the processing of step S813.

(Advantages of the setting value display data table and the setting value conversion table as the embodiment)

Here, in the present embodiment, like the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 stores a data table including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set values. Is stored.
The data table includes setting value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to setting values Vd (“00H” to “02H”) that can be set by the setting change process (see FIG. 10). It includes certain first set value related information and second set value related information which is set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process. Specifically, as the first setting value related information, “00”, “01”, and “05” stored at addresses “6215”, “6216”, and “6217” in the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. , “00”, “00”, and “00” stored at addresses “6218”, “6219”, and “6220”, respectively, correspond to the second setting value related information.
Further, in the data table, at least specific information (i.e., "00" at the address "6215") relating to the set value Ve indicating the stage with the lowest winning probability is stored as the first set value-related information, and The same information as the specific information is stored as the value-related information.

When the set value Vd is a value that cannot be set, the set value Vd stored in the RAM 203 may be rewritten to a value representing the lowest step.
However, if the information is tampered after rewriting, the corresponding information is obtained from the data table based on the unsettable setting value Vd, and there is a possibility that an operation according to the unsettable setting value may be realized.
According to the above configuration, it is impossible to obtain information corresponding to the unsettable setting value Vd from the data table, so that it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being materialized, and to achieve fairness in the game. Can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, 0 is stored as the specific information.
As a result, it is possible to prevent establishment of an illegal act due to falsification of the set value by a simple method of writing the specific information = 0 in the set value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple method.

Further, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 also includes the first setting value-related information which is selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the setting value Vd which can be set by the setting change process. Set value related information (addresses “6203” to “6205”) and second set value related information which is set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process. (Addresses “6206” to “6208”). In the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the second setting value related information.
Accordingly, even if the data table is referred to by the setting value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process due to an improper act or some malfunction, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit (the setting / performance display unit 97 in this example). It is possible to prevent the value display from being performed. Specifically, in this example, data of “00”, that is, “00000000” is acquired as the display data, so that all the segments “0” to “6” in the 7-segment for setting value display are not displayed. As a result, numerical display is not performed.
Therefore, erroneous display of the set value can be prevented.

[4-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]

The main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
The main control-side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (approximately 4 ms), and is executed while the main control-side main process is being executed.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes a power supply check / backup process in step S901. In the power check / backup process, the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is mainly monitored. A backup process of storing predetermined game information at the time in the RAM 203 is performed.

(Power check / backup processing)

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the power supply check / backup process in step S901.
In the power supply check / backup process, the CPU 201 reads the power supply abnormality signal output from the power supply board twice in step S1001, and determines in step S1002 whether the two read values match. If the two values do not match, the flow returns to step S1001 to read the power supply abnormality signal twice.

If both values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether the power failure signal is at a normal level (the power failure signal is OFF = normal level, ON = not normal level).
If the power supply abnormality signal is at the normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns off the backup flag in step S1004, clears the power supply abnormality check counter in step S1005, and ends the power supply abnormality check processing in step S901. That is, when it is confirmed that the power failure signal is at the normal level, the backup process described below is not performed and the timer interrupt process is continued.

On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter by 1 in step S1006, and then sets the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter in step S1007. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold (threshold = natural number of 2 or more: for example, “2”).
If the value of the power supply abnormality check counter is not equal to or larger than the threshold value, the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check processing in step S901. That is, when the state where the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level is detected but not continuously detected, the timer interrupt processing is continued without performing the backup processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality check counter is equal to or larger than the threshold, the CPU 201 performs backup processing shown as steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality check counter (S1108), turns off the firing permission signal (S1009), and turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Further, the CPU 201 transmits a power-off command to the effect control unit 24 (S1011), and proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 performs processing for enabling the RAM protection and setting the prohibited area to invalid.
The RAM protection is a function of preventing rewriting of the RAM 203 due to malfunction or erroneous operation. By setting the RAM protect to valid, only data reading from the RAM 203 can be performed and data cannot be written.
The prohibited area is an area corresponding to the designated area in the IAT (prohibition of driving outside the designated area) function. By setting the prohibited area to invalid, the IAT reset does not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port. In step S1014, the CPU 201 stops the timer interrupt process, sets itself to the interrupt disabled state, and shifts to an infinite loop process.
During this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT, and shifts to the operation stop state due to the loss of the operation power.

The description returns to FIG.
In FIG. 18, when the power check / backup process in step S901 is completed, the CPU 201 executes an input data creation process in step S902. Specifically, input data is created based on input information (ON / OFF signal and rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)) from various sensors and switches.
Here, the input information is, for example, a winning detection switch such as an upper starting sensor 34a, a lower starting sensor 35a, a normal symbol starting sensor 37a, a special winning opening sensor 52a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, and an OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON / OFF information of the output switch signal (winning detection information), and ON / OFF information of the switch signal output from switches related to the setting operation of the setting value Ve such as the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 (operation Information) and status signals from the payout control board 29 (ON / OFF information of the front door opening sensor 61 and the fullness detection sensor 60). As a result, whether or not a game ball has been detected in the out opening or each winning opening is monitored for each interruption.

  After finishing the input data creation process in step S902, the CPU 201 executes a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control in step S903. Here, the values of various timers used for controlling the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 are updated (subtraction processing).

Next, in step S904, the CPU 201 performs an input management process. In this input management process, the values of the winning counter and the OUT ball monitoring counter are updated based on the input data created in the input data creation process (S902). The "winning counter" is a counter provided for each winning opening and counting the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter that counts game balls (out balls) discharged from the out port 49.
The input management processing in step S904 functions as an input management unit that manages input signals (detection signals) from various winning opening sensors.

  In step S905 following step S904, the CPU 201 executes a setting error check process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting error check processing in step S905.
In FIG. 20, in step S1101, the CPU 201 checks a set value error flag. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned on) by the processing of step S1103 described below when an abnormality of the set value Vd is recognized, and in this example, “5AH” means the ON state. .

  If the setting value error flag is “5AH” (ON state) in step S1101, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check processing in step S905. That is, when the setting value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101, transmission of a setting value abnormal command (a command for instructing the effect control unit 24 to execute setting error notification) is executed in step S1104 described later. In this state, the setting error check process ends without transmitting the set value error flag again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the set value error flag is not “5AH” (is OFF), the CPU 201 determines in step S1102 whether the set value Vd is within a normal range (a range of 0 to 2). Determine whether or not. Specifically, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the value is in a range from “00H” to “02H”.

If the setting value Vd is within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check processing in step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1103, sets the set value error flag (ON state), and sets in step S1104 to indicate that the set value Vd is abnormal. The value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check processing ends.
Here, the setting value error flag includes a setting error determination at the time of performing a jackpot random number determination at the start of a change, including a step S1308 (setting error determination at the time of winning) in FIG. This is used in step S1701 in FIG. 28 (setting error determination when performing a fluctuation pattern lottery at the start of fluctuation).

Here, in response to the above set value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs a process for notifying a data abnormality of the set value Ve. For example, a process of displaying an image including a display such as “RAM error. Please call a clerk” on the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed.
In the gaming machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be released by performing a setting change operation.

The description returns to FIG.
After completing the setting error check processing in step S905, the CPU 201 executes error management processing in step S906. In this error management process, the presence or absence of an error is monitored based on input data relating to various sensors and a status signal from the payout control board 29.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201 transmits the command to the effect control unit 24 as an error process if the error type requires transmission of the error command. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error command, the effect control unit 24 performs error notification according to the error type. When the error that has occurred is resolved, the CPU 201 transmits an error release command to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error release command, the error notification being executed is ended.

  Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes a random number management process in a timer interrupt for periodically updating a random number related to each variable display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) with respect to the special symbol determination random number and the auxiliary hit determination random number, and the random number counter is cycled once. Then, a process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Note that the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the random number generation circuit and is not updated here.

  In step S908 following step S907, the CPU 201 executes award ball management processing. In this prize ball management processing, the above-mentioned prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command designating the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the command and executes the payout operation for the designated prize ball number.

  Next, in step S909, the CPU 201 executes a normal symbol management process. In the ordinary symbol management process, a process necessary to execute the ordinary symbol variation display game is performed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the ordinary symbol starting port sensor 37a, and when a game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for judging an assist hit) necessary for a lottery per assist is determined. The game information is acquired (random number acquisition processing), and the game information is held and stored up to the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved balls (pending storage processing) as suspension data (operational suspension balls for ordinary symbols). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition relating to the ordinary figure is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery is performed based on the operation-holding ball, and a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is selected based on the assistance winning lottery result and a stop display mode of the ordinary symbol (normal Stop symbol) is determined. Further, here, in order to normally perform the variable display operation of the symbol, LED display data for variable display is created if the symbol is fluctuating, and LED display data for stop display is created if the symbol is not fluctuating.

  Further, in step S910, CPU 201 executes a normal electric accessory management process. In the ordinary electric accessory management process, a process necessary for executing a public electric opening game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a hit, a process of setting solenoid control data for the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 41c is performed. An excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data set here, whereby the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

Next, in step S911, the CPU 201 executes a special symbol management process. In this special symbol management process, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, a variation pattern of the special symbol (a prefetch variation pattern and a variation pattern at the start of the variation) or a special stop symbol. The processing required for the special symbol change display game, such as the determination of the game, is executed.
The details of the special symbol management process in step S911 will be described again.

Next, the CPU 201 executes a special electric accessory management process in step S912. In the special electric auditors product management process, a setting process required to control the execution of the hit game is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the execution control of the hit game (big hit game) corresponding to the hit type is performed.
Specifically, it sets solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 52c, counts the number of rounds (in the case of a big hit), monitors the maximum winning number and the opening time of the special winning opening 50, and the like. When the winning game is over, the game state transition setting based on the winning state and the winning type is performed.

  Here, a plurality of effect control commands are transmitted in accordance with the progress of the hit game. At the start of the big hit, at the start of the round game, at the end of the round game, at the time of maximizing the number of rounds, etc., it is time to send the big hit start command, round start command, round end command, big win prize winning command, big hit end command, respectively. Send according to. The big hit start command includes the current hit type information, and is used when the effect control unit 24 determines a series of hit effect scenarios developed during the hit game. The big hit end command includes information on the current hit type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information that can specify the game state after the end of the hit game. It is used when determining the production mode after the game. Accordingly, the "big hit end command" can specify the game state after the end of the hit game, and thus plays a role as a game state designation command for designating the game state.

  After finishing the processing for the game progress up to step S912, the CPU 201 performs external terminal management processing in step S913. In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external centralized terminal board 21. The operation state information includes, for example, game information such as winning game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, winning number / prize ball number information, and error information.

  Next, in step S914, the CPU 201 executes an LED management process. In this LED management process, output control of a control signal (dynamic lighting data) to an LED display such as the ordinary symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting / performance indicator 97 is performed. The control signal based on the display data created in the ordinary symbol management process (step S909), the special symbol management process (step S911), and the like is output to the corresponding display device or display in the LED management process, and the display control is performed. Done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and the ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all registers and performs the performance display monitor display process in step S916. That is, this is a process for causing the setting / performance display 97 to display the value as the normal duty ratio information described above.
As mentioned earlier, in the case of this example, the value of the normal time ratio information is calculated again each time the number of all-out balls reaches a predetermined value, and the setting / performance indicator 97 indicates the current normal number. The time ratio information and the previous normal time ratio information (normal time ratio information for which the calculation has been completed at the most recent recalculation timing) can be displayed. Therefore, in the display process of step S916 in this case, a process of displaying these two types of values as the normal ratio information on the setting / performance display 97 is performed.
Note that the value of the current normal ratio information is a value calculated in the process of step S604 in the main loop process (FIG. 11) described above, and the value of the previous normal ratio information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads out the stored value and causes the setting / performance display 97 to display it.

  Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all the registers in step S917, clears the WDT count value in step S918, and ends the main control timer interrupt process.

When the above timer interrupt processing is completed, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[4-3. Processing related to special symbol variation display game]
(Special symbol management processing)

Next, the processing of the main control unit 20 relating to the special symbol change display game will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol management process (step S911) described above. As described above, the special symbol management process is executed as a part of the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18. A special pattern fluctuation pattern (a pre-reading fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation) and a special stop symbol are determined based on the special pattern.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 starting port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) in step S1201, and then performs a special symbol 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) on step S1202. Of the special figure 2 starting port.
The details of the starting port check process will be described again with reference to FIG.

  After finishing the start-up opening check process in steps S1201 and S1202, the CPU 201 determines the state of the condition device operation flag in step S1203. The "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (for example, 5AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (for example, 00H), it indicates that the big hit is not being played.

  When the condition device operation flag is OFF ($ 5AH), that is, when the big hit is not being played, the CPU 201 proceeds to a special symbol operation status branching process of step S1204, and according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H), a special symbol operation status is determined. Processing related to the variable display operation is performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that a big hit game is being played (= 5AH), the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol display data updating process of step S1208 without performing the process related to the special symbol change display operation of steps S1205 to S1207. That is, when a big hit game is being played, the special symbol change display operation is not performed (the display state of the special symbol on the special symbol display device is kept fixed and displayed after the big hit). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. The status value is changed according to the processing state, and is stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S1204, the special symbol operation status is determined depending on which status value is “standby (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)”, or “confirming (03H)”. , Execute the corresponding processing.

  Specifically, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol change start process (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, and executes the special symbol change process when the special symbol operation status is “changing (02H)”. If the symbol change processing (step S1206) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S1207) is executed. Here, the “waiting” means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and the “changing” means that the behavior of the special symbol is varying (variation display). The above "confirming" means that the change of the special symbol has been completed and the stop (fixed) display is being performed (during the special symbol confirmation time).

  In the special symbol changing process of step S1206, it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the changing time of the special symbol has elapsed. The process of transmitting the "fluctuation stop command" to the effect control unit 24, storing the determined display time (for example, 500 ms) in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and switching the special symbol operation status to "under confirmation (03H)" (Stores 03H in the special symbol operation status). The “fluctuation stop command” is a command indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has been completed, and the fluctuation control command causes the effect control unit 24 to terminate the special symbol fluctuation display game after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. It grasps the fact (end) and stops and displays the decoration pattern that is currently displayed in a fluctuating manner. Thereby, along with the end of the special symbol variation display game, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated. The “fixed display time” is a time (stop display time) in which the stop display is held when the special symbol change display ends and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the above-described final display time has elapsed. The symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and if the special symbol variation display game is a big hit, a process required to start a big hit game (big hit symbol stop) Various setting processes). In the various setting processing when the big hit symbol is stopped, various settings such as clearing the big hit determination flag, turning on the condition device operation flag, and setting the game state to the same game state as the normal state as a pre-big hit game shift processing. Perform processing.
In the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, when the game state is updated, a process of transmitting a "game state designation command" including game state transition information to the effect control unit 24 is performed. The effect control unit 24 can recognize that the gaming state has been shifted by the gaming state designation command.

By the processing in steps S1205, S1206, and S1207, a variable display operation for setting one set of the start and stop of the change of the special symbol is realized.
The details of the special symbol change start process in step S1205 will be described again with reference to FIG.

  After ending any of the processes in steps S1205 to S1207, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol display data updating process in step S1208. In this special symbol display data update processing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing. If the special symbol is changing, data for 7-segment display in which the special symbol is changing is created, and the special symbol must be changed. For example, 7-segment display data during special symbol stop display is created. The special symbol display data created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management process (step S914) in FIG.

The CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process of step S911 in response to executing the update process of step S1208, and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 starting port check processing)

The special figure 1 start-up opening check process (step S1201) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
The special figure 1 starting port check process plays a role as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. In the special figure 1 starting port check processing in this example, as the pre-start processing for executing the special symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side (prize processing on the special figure 1 side), a winning of the upper starting port 34 occurs. The processing of adding the number of operation-holding spheres on the special figure 1 side resulting from this, the processing of storing various random numbers (holding storage processing), the processing of transmitting a hold addition command, and the like are executed.
Note that the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a prize winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, similarly to the special figure 1 starting port check process. As a pre-start process (a winning process on the special figure 2 side) for executing the special symbol change display game 2, the addition processing of the number of operation-reserved balls on the special figure 2 due to the occurrence of a winning in the lower starting port 35, The storage processing of various random numbers, the transmission processing of the hold addition command, and the like are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 starting port check processing and the special figure 2 starting port check processing have substantially the same processing contents. Hereinafter, the special figure 1 starting port check processing will be mainly described, and the details of the special figure 2 starting port check processing will be omitted to avoid redundant description.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether a winning (winning ball) to the upper starting port 34 has been detected.
If a winning in the upper starting port 34 is detected, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 to determine whether or not the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “special-figure 1 operation-reserved ball”) is four or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls is equal to or greater than the maximum reserved storage number (here, the upper limit is four). However, when the winning detection of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S1301: N), the special figure 1 starting port check process of step S1201 is finished without doing anything.

  If the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is 4 or more in step S1302, that is, if the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected but the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is 4 or more, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 described below. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1304, the CPU 201 obtains various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time. Specifically, the current values of the big hit determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are obtained from various random number counters, and the obtained random numbers are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The holding storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). In the holding storage area, the various random numbers as the holding data are specially stored. Until the change display operation of the symbol 1 is performed (until the special symbol change display game 1 is executed), the starting conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area has a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These hold storage areas are provided with a hold 1 storage area to a hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of hold storages: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and can hold the hold data of the maximum hold storage number respectively. It has become.

In step S1305 following step S1304, the CPU 201 determines, as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a hold addition command, read-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: “01H”).
Next, in step S1306, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied. The special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  If the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 without executing the prefetching determination process (step S1309) related to the prefetching determination. In this case, the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: “01H”) specifies the look-ahead prohibition, and the look-ahead determination for the current special figure 1 operation pending ball is prohibited, and as a result, the look-ahead notice No production will be performed. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data can be said to specify that the pre-read determination processing (step S1309) has not been executed.

In this example, instead of performing the pre-read determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of the game state, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading is prohibited based on the current game state. The reason is as follows.
In the case of a game state with “electric support”, which is advantageous for right-handed driving (time saving state, probable change state), a prize to the lower starting port 35 frequently occurs, but left-handed advantage is obtained. In the case of a game state with "no electric support" (normal state, latent state), a prize in the upper starting port 34 frequently occurs with almost no prize in the lower starting port 35. In consideration of the above, the pre-read determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed irrespective of the game state, but the pre-read determination of the special figure 1 side is performed in the time saving state or the probable change state of “with electric support”. Is prohibited, the pre-reading determination on the special figure 2 side is allowed, and in the normal state or the latent state of “no electric support”, the pre-reading determination on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the pre-reading determination on the special figure 1 side is performed. Is allowed.

If the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied in step S1306, the CPU 201 refers to the set value error flag (the flag set in the setting abnormality check processing in step S905) in step S1307, and sets the setting error in step S1308. It is determined whether or not the setting value error flag is ON (5AH).
In the case of a setting error, the CPU 201 determines that an abnormality (abnormal setting value data) has occurred, and proceeds to step S1311 without executing the prefetch determination process (step S1309). Although details will be described later, if an abnormality of the set value Vd is recognized in the processing at the time of winning, a hold addition command including the pre-read prohibition data (01H) is transmitted without causing a RAM error, and the starting port check in step S1201 is performed. Processing will be exited.

  On the other hand, if there is no setting error, the CPU 201 executes a prefetch determination process in step S1309. In this prefetch determination process, the result of the jackpot lottery executed at the start of the fluctuation is determined in advance. Therefore, a series of a series of processes related to 'read-ahead hit determination', which pre-determines the hit lottery result, 'pre-read symbol judgment', which pre-determines the symbol lottery result, and 'pre-read variation pattern determination', which pre-determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation. Processing is included.

  More specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first obtains the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the RAM 203 (determination random number storage area), and stores the random number value for jackpot determination and a "big hit determination random number determination table" described later. , A winning lottery (at least a look-ahead hit determination for determining a big hit or a miss) for the current operation-holding ball is performed, and the result (referred to as a “look-ahead hit result”) is obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the set value Vd is used for the win determination (win lottery), but a specific method of the win determination according to the present embodiment based on such a set value Vd will be described later. Since the hit determination is performed in the same manner in the process (FIG. 23) at the start of the change of the special symbol, a specific method of the hit determination will be described again when the process at the start of the change is described.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the prefetching omission result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201. This is because the result of the prefetching hit determination is immediately used in the subsequent prefetching symbol determination process, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM 203.

In step S1309, the CPU 201 executes a symbol table (not shown) corresponding to a prefetched hit result (at least whether a hit or a miss) and a special symbol type (special figures 1 and 2) as the prefetch symbol determination processing. The used symbol lottery is performed. Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery (a lottery of a hit type) for the current operation-holding ball based on the special symbol determination random number obtained in the previous step S1304 and the symbol table, and as a result (“ (Referred to as "read-ahead design result"). In the "symbol table" of the present embodiment, a determination value (winning area) for determining a symbol type is determined, and is displayed as a stopped symbol depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. The type of special symbol to be performed is determined.
When there are a plurality of types of slips as in this example, a slip design table for determining a slip type is provided. If there is only one type of miss, a miss design table is unnecessary.
Here, in the present example, in correspondence with the plurality of types of “losing 1”, “losing 2”, and “losing 3”, a symbol design table for lottery selection of the type of loss is used in the symbol determination. I do.
Also, in this example, there are at least four types of hits, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probable change 6R", and "probable change 10R", as described above. Based on the winning symbol table, the type of the special symbol corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the random number for special symbol determination among these four types of winning types is determined.

  Here, for some or all of the above-described symbol tables, a symbol table in which different symbol selection rates are determined according to the set value Ve may be provided. For example, with respect to the big hit symbol table, a table having a different selection rate of the big hit type for each of the settings 1 to 6 (for example, six kinds of big hit symbol tables corresponding to the six settings) can be provided. For example, it is conceivable to determine the table contents so that the payout performance becomes more advantageous to the player as the setting becomes higher. Of course, it may be a big hit symbol table common to each setting. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used for the process at the start of the change (FIG. 23).

  The CPU 201 does not store the prefetched symbol result in the RAM 203 while fetching the prefetched symbol result into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201 in the same manner as in the above-described determination of prefetching hit. This is because the look-ahead symbol result is used immediately in the subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM 203.

  After finishing the above-mentioned pre-reading symbol determination, the CPU 201 executes a pre-reading variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, the look-ahead symbol result (in this example, any one of “normal 4R”, “normal 6R”, “probable change 6R”, “probable change 10R”, “miss 1”, “miss 2” and “miss 3”) Then, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern according to the result of the look-ahead symbol and a variation pattern random number using the variation pattern random number acquired in step S1304 are determined to determine a prefetch variation pattern. That is, a change pattern (a change pattern at the start of the change) executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the change display operation is determined in advance.

In this example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table is also used in the lottery selection of the fluctuation pattern performed in the processing at the start of the fluctuation (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the above-described variation pattern table and a lottery process of the variation pattern using the table will be described again when describing the process at the start of the variation.

  The result of the prefetch variation pattern determination (winning command data (EVENT)) is used immediately in the pending addition command creation processing in step S1310 described below, and thereafter, this data is not required. Therefore, the CPU 201 terminates the processing of step S1309 while keeping the result of the prefetch variation pattern determination in the register without storing it in the RAM 203.

In response to the execution of the prefetch determination processing in step S1309, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1310, and creates data on the lower byte side of the hold addition command according to the result of the prefetch determination. Specifically, data representing the type of the prefetch variation pattern is created as winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the hold addition command.
For the EVENT data, “01H” set in step S1305 is updated to a value corresponding to the prefetch variation pattern (the value obtained in the prefetch variation pattern determination process) in this process.

After completing the creation processing in step S1310, in step S1311, the CPU 201 creates data on the upper byte side of the hold addition command corresponding to the number of active balls. That is, data representing the current number of active balls and the above-described pre-read symbol result (special symbol type) is created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the pending addition command.
The MODE data is set so as to be able to identify one reservation from special figure 1 to four reservations in special figure 1, and one reservation from special figure 2 to four reservations in special figure 2.

  In response to the execution of the creation process in step S1311, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a hold addition command in step S1312. That is, a hold addition command including the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE, respectively, is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Here, when the read-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (Y in S1306) or when an abnormality of the set value Vd is recognized in the determination processing of the previous step S1308, the CPU 201 sets the above-described read-ahead prohibition data (lower byte = 01H). Is maintained without being updated, and a hold addition command having prefetch prohibited data is transmitted.
In addition, at the time of overflow (when a new prize is generated when the maximum number of pending storages has been reached), a pending addition command specifying overflow is transmitted (see the processing route of Y in step S1302). ).

  After the hold addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect is used when the effect control unit 24 presents the "read ahead notice effect" relating to the current operation holding ball. This is not particularly used in the special symbol change start process shown in FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 201 exits the special figure 1 starting port check processing of step S1301 without storing the hold addition command in the RAM 203, and subsequently performs the special figure 2 starting port check processing of step S1302.

Here, as described above, in the present example, the hold addition command is transmitted even when an abnormality occurs in the data of the set value Vd at the time of winning (when the operation hold ball is generated). Since the command has read-ahead prohibition data, even if the pre-reading notice effect based on the set value Ve or the pre-read notice effect not based on the set value Ve is configured to be able to appear, the effect related to the look-ahead notice Since the control itself is prohibited, a pre-reading notice due to the malfunction does not appear and there is no disadvantage to the player, so that no particular problem occurs. If the prefetch notice effect is not prohibited, if a hold display with a high degree of expectation appears in the prefetch notice effect of the hold display system even though the set value Ve is abnormal, the subsequent RAM error processing If the progress of the game is stopped due to (error processing caused by an abnormal set value), the feeling of winning expectation held by the player will be lost at once, resulting in great distrust of the gaming machine. However, in the case of the present example, as described above, the pre-reading notice itself is prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur and the player is prevented from being distrusted.

(Special symbol change start processing)

Next, the special symbol change start process (step S1205), which is the process at the start of change, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1401 whether or not the number of special figure 2 operation-reserved balls is zero. If the number of special figure 2 operation-reserved balls is not zero, the process proceeds to step S1403. The process (Steps S1403 to S1412) at the time of starting the fluctuation for the special figure 2 operation-holding ball to be used for the fluctuation display is performed.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 operation pending ball count is zero, the CPU 201 determines in step S1402 whether the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is zero. Proceeding to the process of step S1403, the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of the change of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation reserve ball to be used for the present change display is performed.
By the processing in steps S1401 and S1402, which of the special figure 1 operation-holding sphere and the special figure 2 operation-holding sphere is preferentially subjected to the fluctuation display operation (which operation-holding sphere is preferentially digested) ) Is determined. In this embodiment, when the operation reserve ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation reserve ball and the special figure 2 operation reserve ball, the special figure 2 operation reserve ball is preferentially digested. That is, the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed with higher priority than the special symbol variation display game 1. The configuration is not limited to the above-described priority change type, and the operation pending balls may be digested in the order of winning.

  When both the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 1 are zero, a state of "no operation reserved ball" is set. The state of "no operation holding ball" is a case where the special symbol is in a standby state and no state of holding the memory, and the effect control unit 24 is notified that the state has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display is performed. The device 36 is controlled to switch to a customer waiting standby demonstration screen display (customer waiting demonstration screen). Therefore, when it is determined that "there is no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "there is no operation pending ball". .

In step S1413, if the special symbol operation status is "standby (01H)", the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, a "demo display command" for displaying the customer waiting demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S1415), and the special symbol change start process of step S1205 is ended.
Thereafter, when the determination process of step S1413 is executed, if it is “standby (00H)”, the special symbol change start process ends without transmitting the demo display command again. The reason for this is that if the demonstration display command is transmitted without any condition when the number of operation pending balls is zero, the transmission of the demo display command is repeated at a period of 4 ms while the number of special figure operation pending balls is zero. In consideration of the fact that unnecessary transmission occurs and the control load is increased unnecessarily, it is to prevent such transmission.

  Note that, even if a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, if the effect control unit 24 does not receive any effect control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol variable display game, the variable display operation is performed. Is deemed to have occurred for a certain period of time (a customer waiting standby state), and a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed.

If the number of special figure 2 operation-reserved balls is not zero in step S1401, and if the number of special figure 1 operation-reserved balls is not zero in step S1402 (the number of special figure 2 operation-reserved balls is zero, while the number of special figure 1 operation-reserved balls is zero) In each of the cases where the number is not zero, the CPU 201 performs the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of the change of the special symbol for the operation-holding ball to be used for the present change display.
Here, regarding the processing of steps S1403 to S1412 described below, if the determination in step S1401 is “NO”, the processing for the special figure 2 operation-holding ball is performed, and the processing in step S1402 is performed. If the answer is "NO", the process is for the special figure 1 operation reserved ball. However, since the processing method is the same, the operation of the special symbol 1 side is performed unless otherwise necessary to avoid redundant description. The process will be described without discriminating whether the process is for the reserved ball or the process for the activated reserved ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of operation-reserved balls (the number of operation-reserved balls related to the special symbol used for the current fluctuation display operation-1), and includes information on the number of operation-reserved balls after the subtraction in step S1404. A “subtraction subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. In response to the hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the number of remaining operation-holding balls after the current operation-holding ball number digestion, and shift-displays the hold display currently being displayed.

  Next, the CPU 201 sets special symbol operation confirmation data in step S1405. The special symbol operation confirmation data is information for specifying the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time. For example, if the special symbol 1 is on the fluctuation start side, "00H (special figure 1 fluctuation start designation)" If the special symbol 2 is on the change start side, “01H (special symbol 2 change start designation)” is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area).

  Next, in step S1406, the CPU 201 shifts the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203, and clears the hold 4 storage area in subsequent step S1407. In the processing in steps S1406 to S1407, the hold data (the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the special symbol determination, and the random number for the variation pattern) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold number n = 1. The random number) is read out, stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and stored in a reserved storage area (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The pending data stored in the (area) are stored in the pending storage areas respectively corresponding to 'n-1' (step S1406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S1407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of operation-holding balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the number of operation-holding balls acquired at the time of starting opening prize is any of the hold storage. Whether or not it corresponds to the area is specified, and the new operation-holding ball can be held and stored.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting the remaining change count designation command and the game state command. In this step S1408, it is determined whether or not a “power support counter” for counting the remaining number of times when the power support is present is zero. A command for specifying the remaining number of times is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. With this “variation number remaining designation command”, the effect control unit 24 can execute a process of grasping the remaining number of time reductions and informing the remaining time reduction number information.
In step S1408, a process of transmitting a game state command specifying the current game state to the effect control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes a fluctuation management process in step S1409.
In the fluctuation management process, a jackpot lottery corresponding to the start of the fluctuation, a symbol lottery for the stopped symbol, and a lottery of the fluctuation pattern are performed. In addition, in the fluctuation management process, an abnormality of the set value Vd is determined. ) Is transmitted.
The details of the change management processing in step S1409 will be described again with reference to FIGS.

After the change management process in step S1409, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in a special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) designating that change display is being performed in step S1410. The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating whether any of the special symbols of interest in special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is ON (= 5AH). Indicates that the target special symbol is changing, and if the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the target special symbol is stopped.
The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes a command transmission process at the start of the change. In this command transmission process, in order to notify the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process in step S1409, the effect control command includes “variation pattern information that includes variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern. A pattern designating command is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.
In the command transmission process, a decoration symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result in step S1409, and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The decorative symbol designating command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the variable side and a lower byte (EVENT) for designating the winning type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the changing side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Since the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the winning type, the effect control unit 24 mainly performs a combination of decorative symbols (a symbol type having the reach symbol as a component) when forming the reach state, It is used when determining a combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed, a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variable display game, and the like.
Further, in the command transmission process, a setting value command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current setting value Ve is also transmitted. With this set value command, the effect control unit 24 can make different types of effects appear according to the current set value Ve, or change the appearance rate of the predetermined effect.

  Then, in the subsequent step S1412, the CPU 201 switches to a special symbol operation status “variing (02H)” (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status) as a variation start setting process, and stores a random number storage area for determination and a random number for variation pattern. A process for clearing the storage area is performed.

In response to executing the change start time setting process of step S1412, the CPU 201 ends the special symbol change start process of step S1205. After finishing the special symbol change start process, the CPU 201 performs a special symbol display data update process (step S1208) in FIG. 21, thereby starting the special symbol change display.

(Change management processing)

FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating the change management processing in step S1409.
Referring to FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1501 whether a setting error has occurred. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value error flag is in the ON state (5AH).

If the CPU 201 determines in step S1501 that the setting error flag is OFF and is not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination processing in step S1502, and then proceeds to the symbol lottery processing in step S1503.
The jackpot random number determination process of step S1502 selects (determines) a jackpot / losing hit type based on the jackpot random number (internal lottery random number), the jackpot random number determination table, and the set value Vd by lottery. is there.
The details of the jackpot random number determination processing according to the embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

  If the CPU 201 determines that there is a setting error in step S1501, the CPU 201 passes the big hit random number determination process in step S1502, and proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error occurs (when the determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the jackpot random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As described above, the setting error can be canceled by performing a setting change operation. That is, when a setting error state occurs, a setting change operation is performed to release the setting error state, thereby returning to a state where the jackpot random number determination processing is performed.
As described above, the setting value abnormality command for causing the setting change operation to be performed is transmitted in the setting abnormality checking process (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process of step S1503, the CPU 201 determines the type of the hit / losing (the type of the stopped symbol) based on at least the winning lottery result (big hit determination flag), the special symbol determination random number, and the symbol table. Do. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203. As a result, the winning type (winning / losing type) relating to the present special symbol change display game is determined.
In addition, similarly to the symbol lottery process at the time of the pre-read determination, the symbol lottery can be performed according to the set value Vd.

In step S1504 subsequent to step S1503, the CPU 201 performs the current fluctuation display operation as a fluctuation pattern lottery process based on at least the symbol lottery result (the above-described special symbol determination data), the fluctuation pattern random number, and the fluctuation pattern table. A process of determining, by lottery, a fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation for the operation-holding ball is performed.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery process in the present embodiment, a variation pattern lottery using the set value Vd and the number of operation-reserved balls (the number of operation-reserved balls obtained by subtracting the current digestion) is performed.
The details of the variation pattern lottery process in the present embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS.

  In response to executing the variation pattern lottery process of step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the variation management process of step S1409. That is, thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410 illustrated in FIG.

Here, as described above, in this example, the lottery results of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203. The reason is that these lottery results are stored in the fluctuation management processing in step S1409. Is not used only in the special symbol management process (steps S911: see FIG. 18 and FIG. 21) to which it belongs, but is also used in the later-described special electric accessory management process (step S912: see FIG. 18) and the like. It is.
This point is different from the processing at the time of prefetch determination in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203.

Although not shown in the drawings, in the fluctuation management processing in step S1409, when the winning lottery result is a hit, as a setting processing for shifting the gaming state, the change management processing for specifying the gaming state after the hitting game is performed. Perform necessary setting processing (game state transition preparation processing).

(Big hit random number judgment processing)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination processing in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination technique of the embodiment.
Prior to the detailed description of the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25, a jackpot random number determination method employed in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as a premise, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number can take 65536 values from 0 to 65535. In the big hit random number judgment in the present embodiment, the judgment reference value TH is determined within a range of values that the big hit judgment random number can take, and based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the big hit judgment random number and the judgment reference value TH, A jackpot / losing judgment is made. As an example, in this example, a method of obtaining a big hit determination result when the value of the random number for big hit determination is within the range of “0 to the determination reference value TH”, and a method of obtaining a determination result of misalignment otherwise is adopted. I have.

In the present embodiment, as a big hit random number judgment, a judgment corresponding to a low probability time (in a normal state: hereinafter, abbreviated as “low probability”) and a high probability time (in a probable change state: hereinafter, abbreviated as “high probability”). Are performed. For this reason, two types of determination reference values TH are set, a determination reference value TH1 used for determination of low accuracy and a determination reference value TH2 used for determination of high accuracy.
As illustrated in FIG. 26, the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is set to be larger than the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, thereby increasing the probability of winning a big hit in the judgment of high accuracy. ing.

In the case of this example, a different value is prepared for each set value Ve as the judgment reference value TH in order to perform the jackpot random number judgment according to the set value Ve. As a specific example, as to the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, a value (BIGLMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve “1”, a value (BIGLMAX2) corresponding to the set value Ve “2”, and a set value Ve “6” (BIGLMAX6) is prepared, and the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is also a value (BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve “1”, a value (BIGHMAX2) corresponding to the set value Ve “2”, and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve “6” is prepared. The judgment reference value TH1 (= 842) at the time of low accuracy and the judgment reference value TH2 (= 8429) at the time of high accuracy illustrated in FIG. 26 respectively exemplify values (BIGLMAX1, BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve “1”. doing.
In this example, the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is BIGLMAX1 <BIGLMAX2 <BIGLMAX6, and the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is BIGHMAX1 <BIGHMAX2 <BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning.

In this example, in the actual determination process, a “lower limit of determination” (corresponding to “BIGMINI-1” described later) is also used as a threshold value for the random number value. First, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the “judgment lower limit value”, and if the random number value is not larger than the “judgment lower limit value”, a judgment result of an outlier is obtained. When the random number value is larger than the “determination lower limit value”, a big hit determination using the above-described determination reference values TH1 and TH2 is performed.
When the “judgment lower limit” is set to “0”, the big hit determination condition is that the random number is within the range of “0” to “judgment reference value TH”. On the other hand, if the “judgment lower limit” is set to a value larger than “0” (X), it is determined that the random number is within the range of “X” to “judgment reference value TH”. Become.

Based on the above premise, the big hit random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In FIG. 25, first, in step S1601, the CPU 201 acquires the setting difference information from the random number determination table for jackpot determination.

FIG. 27 illustrates a random number determination table for big hit determination used in the big hit random number determination process. FIG. 27A shows a random number determination table for big hit determination for Tokuju 1 and FIG. 9 illustrates a random number determination table.
As the jackpot random number determination process, a determination process for the special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and a determination process for the special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed. Since the same processing is performed by the common processing shown in FIG. 25, only the determination processing for the special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A will be representatively described below.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored in the current reference address in the table shown in FIG. 27A, and at the start of the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. As the start address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by “000H” stored at the start address as setting difference information.
In subsequent step S1602, CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting difference information is other than “000H”. If the setting difference information is “000H” and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1603 and acquires a determination reference value. That is, the variable (the variable represented by “BIGMIN-1”) stored at the address next to the head address in the table shown in FIG. 27A is acquired as the determination reference value. This processing corresponds to the above-described processing for acquiring the “judgment lower limit value”.
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 performs processing for shifting to a specified address. More specifically, the above-mentioned reference destination address is shifted from the current reference destination address (“4093” in FIG. 27A) to the next four addresses (“4097” in FIG. 27A).
Then, in step S1610, CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value (the value of the random number for jackpot determination) is larger than the determination reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601, S1602, S1603, S1604, and S1610 described above corresponds to a process of determining whether the random number is greater than the above-described determination lower limit.

If the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value in step S1610, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 to acquire small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the lower limit of determination (“BIGMIN-1”), a variable represented by “000H, 000H, 000H” at the address next to the lower limit of determination. Is stored. The variables correspond to “low-probability medium-and-big-hit information”, “high-probability medium-and-big-hit information”, and “small-hit / low-hit information” in order from the left.
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the lower limit of determination (“BIGMIN-1”) in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random number value at the next address of the lower limit of determination. The rightmost “000H” among the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” of the hit information is acquired.
In the hit information, “05AH” indicates “hit”, and “000H” indicates “out”.

In step S1612 following step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability is changing. If the probability is not changing, the CPU 201 acquires low-probability medium-and-big hit information in step S1613 and ends the big hit random number determination process in step S1502. If so, the high-accuracy medium-and-big-hit information is acquired in step S1614, and the big-hit random number determination process in step S1502 ends.
Here, when the low-probability medium-and-big-hit information acquisition process in step S1613 is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the lower limit of determination (“BIGMIN-1”), In step S1613, the CPU 201 acquires the leftmost “000H” among the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” of the hit information stored at the address next to the determination lower limit (“BIGMIN-1”).
In addition, the high-accuracy medium-and-big-hit information acquisition process in step S1614 is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the lower limit of determination ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610. In this case, the CPU 201 acquires the center “000H” of the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” of the hit information stored at the address next to the lower limit of the determination (“BIGMIN-1”).

  If the random number value is equal to or less than the lower limit of the determination by the above-described series of processing, information on the outlier is obtained.

Subsequently, if it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires the setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table.
When the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is greater than the lower limit of determination in step S1610, the above-described reference destination address is “4097” shown in FIG. 27A. As the setting difference information, “001H” stored at the reference destination address is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, a determination result that the setting difference information is other than “000H” is obtained in the subsequent step S1602, and the CPU 201 advances the process to step S1605.

The processing of steps S1605 to S1609 is processing related to the acquisition of the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, a process relating to the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as a process of acquiring the set value information, and corrects the acquired set value information by two bytes in step S1606. That is, in this example, the set value Vd set to 1 byte is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 acquires a determination reference value corresponding to the set value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the set value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
When step S1607 is executed for the first time after the start of the big hit random number determination process in step S1502, the reference destination address is “4097” shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the reference value stored at the address deviated from the reference destination address by the amount corresponding to the correction information (that is, in this case, “BIGLMAX1” of the address “4098” and “BIGLMAX2” of the address “4099”) "Any of" BIGLMAX6 "of the address" 4100 "). Specifically, in this case, if the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve “1” (set value Vd = “00H”), “BIGLMAX1” at the address next to the reference address is acquired, If the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve “2” (set value Vd = “01H”), “BIGLMAX2” at the address two ahead of the reference address is acquired, and the correction information is set to the set value Ve. If it corresponds to “3” (set value Vd = “02H”), “BIGLMAX6” at the address three ahead of the reference address is acquired.

  In response to the acquisition of the determination reference value in step S1607, the CPU 201 determines whether the random number value is larger than the determination reference value in step S1610 via the processing of steps S1608 to S1609 (the processing will be described later). judge. As a result, a big hit determination is performed using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy.

In step S1610, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed, and when it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, it is a big hit), the above-described steps after step S1611 are performed. The process is executed, and a process of acquiring the hit information is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the low-accuracy determination reference value TH1 (“BIGLMAX1,” “BIGLMAX2,” “BIGLMAX6”) is stored as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the low-accuracy determination reference value TH1 is used. A variable represented by “05AH, 05AH, 000H” is stored at the next address of the area (“4098” to “4100”). Big hit information "and" small hit information ").
In the process of step S1611 performed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH1 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random number value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The rightmost “000H” of the variables “05AH, 05AH, 000H” of the hit information thus obtained is acquired.
In this case, if the probability is not being changed, the CPU 201 determines in the process of step S1613 among the variables “05AH, 05AH, 000H” of the hit information stored at the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. If the leftmost “05AH” is acquired, and if the probability is being changed, the central “05AH” of the variable “05AH, 05AH, 000H” of the corresponding information is acquired in the process of step S1614.

Here, in step S1610, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed, and the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, the determination at the time of low accuracy is "out"). In this case, a big hit determination using the determination reference value TH2 (“BIGHMAX1,” “BIGHMAX2,” “BIGHMAX6”) at the time of high accuracy is performed. At this time, the reference destination address is the address “4097” shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the head address of the information storage area (“4097” to “4101”) for the big hit determination using the low-precision determination reference value TH1. Therefore, the address should be shifted to the address “4103”, that is, the head address of the information storage area (“4103” to “4107”) for the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.
If the set value Ve has three levels, the address shift amount is equivalent to six addresses from “4097” → “4103”. In the information storage area for the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1, not only "BIGLMAX1,""BIGLMAX2," and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3,""BIGLMAX4," and "BIGLMAX5." That is, in this case, the address shift amount should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase of the three determination reference values TH1.

  As described above, when the reference destination is shifted from the information storage area corresponding to the low-probability state to the information storage area corresponding to the high-precision state in the table, the shift amount of the reference destination address depends on the number of stages of the set value Ve (the set value Ve Number). For this reason, in the present example, the setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and in the following step S1609, a process of shifting to the specified address based on the setting stage information is performed. Specifically, in this example, the setting stage information indicating “three stages” is obtained, and the reference destination address is shifted to the next address by six addresses based on the setting stage information.

When the processing in steps S1608 and S1609 is performed, a large hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed in step S1610, and it is determined that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value TH1. In the process of step S1601, the setting difference information “001H” of the address “4103” shown in FIG. 27A is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, the setting difference information is determined to be other than “000H” in the determination processing of step S1602, and the processing of step S1605 and thereafter is executed again.
In the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 according to the set value Ve is obtained from the determination reference values TH2 of “BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, and “BIGHMAX6”, and is obtained through steps S1608 and S1609. In the determination processing of step S1610 performed, it is determined whether the random number value is greater than the acquired determination reference value TH2. That is, a big hit determination is performed using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.

As described above, in step S1610, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed, and when it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 (a big hit), the processing in and after step S1611 is performed. Through the process, a hit information acquisition process is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case of using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy, the storage area (“4104” to “4106”) of the determination reference value TH2 at high accuracy is used. Variables represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" are stored at the next address (the variables also represent "low-probability medium-and-big-hit information", "high-probability medium-and-big-hit information" and "small-hit information" in order from the left). .
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random value is not greater than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random number value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information thus obtained is acquired.
In this case, if the probability is not being changed, the CPU 201 determines in the process of step S1613 among the variables “000H, 05AH, 000H” of the hit information stored at the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. If the leftmost “000H” is acquired and the probability is being changed, the central “05AH” of the variable “000H, 05AH, 000H” of the corresponding information is acquired in the process of step S1614. That is, if the probability is not being changed, the information of "out" is obtained, and if the probability is changed, the information of "hit" is obtained.

In step S1610, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed, and the random number value is determined to be larger than the determination reference value TH2 (that is, the random number value is out of both of the determination reference values TH1 and TH2). In this case, in this example, processing is performed based on the information stored in the areas of addresses “4109” to “4111” in the table shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the out-of-bounds information for acquiring the out-of-bounds information.
Here, depending on the processing in steps S1608 and S1609 executed when the high-accuracy determination reference value TH2 is obtained in step S1607, the reference destination address is six addresses ahead of the previous address “4103”. It will be shifted to “4109”. Accordingly, in the process of step S1601 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, “000H” stored at the address “4109” is acquired as the setting difference information. Is done. That is, in this case, the process proceeds from step S1601 to step S1602 to step S1603.

  Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, “65535” is stored as a determination reference value in the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) of the out-of-offset correspondence information at the next address (“4110”) of the set difference information. Is stored. That is, the “missing judgment reference value” for reliably obtaining the judgment of a random number that can take a value of 0 to 65535 is stored. Further, variables “000H, 000H, 000H” representing the deviation information are stored at the address (“4111”) next to the deviation determination reference value. The variables are also information corresponding to low-probability medium, high-probability medium, and small hits in order from the left.

  In this case, in the acquisition processing in step S1603, “65535” as the “outside determination reference value” stored at the address next to the reference destination address is obtained as the determination reference value. Then, in the determination processing of step S1610 executed through the processing of step S1604, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than “missing determination reference value” = 65535. A determination result that the value is not larger than the “missing determination reference value” is obtained.

As described above, in step S1610, the determination using the “missing determination reference value” is performed, and when it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the “missing determination reference value”, the missing information is obtained by the processing in step S1611 and thereafter. Is obtained.
Specifically, in the process of step S1611 performed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the “missing determination reference value” in step S1610, the CPU 201 sets the “missing determination reference value” in the table. Of the variable "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of "000H" is acquired.
In this case, if the probability is not being changed, the CPU 201 determines in the process of step S1613 the leftmost “000H” of the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” stored at the address next to the “missing determination reference value”. If it is acquired and the probability is being changed, in the process of step S1614, the central “000H” of the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” is acquired.
As described above, when it is determined that both of the determination reference values TH1 and TH2 are out of order, each “hit information” (small hit information, low-probability medium-large hit information, high-precision Information indicating “outside” is acquired as the middle and big hit information).

(Variation pattern lottery processing)

The variation pattern lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504.
First, in step S1701, the CPU 201 determines whether or not a setting error has occurred based on the setting error flag. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit (= 5 AH) is based on the big hit determination flag.

If it is determined in step S1702 that there is no hit (miss), the CPU 201 selects a shift variation pattern table in step S1703, and proceeds to the variation pattern selection processing in step S1706. That is, this is a process of selecting a variation pattern based on the table and the variation pattern random numbers.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that a hit has occurred, the CPU 201 selects a hit change pattern table in step S1704, and then proceeds to a change pattern selection process in step S1706.

FIG. 29 shows an example of the loss variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of the hit variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, a variation pattern table for Toku-zu 1 and a variation pattern table for Toku-zu 2 are prepared as the loss variation pattern table and the hit variation pattern table, respectively.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of deviation performed using the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 29, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates (variation patterns that can be selected by lottery) are “normal variation 4s”, “normal variation 6s”, and “normal variation”. There are nine types: 8s, "normal fluctuation 12s", "normal reach", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4".
In the variation pattern at the time of hitting performed using the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 30, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are “normal variation hit”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, and “super reach 3”. There are five types of "Super Reach 4".
It should be noted that, for “normal fluctuation”, a numerical value described together indicates a fluctuation time, and “s” after the numerical value means “second”.

  Here, among the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns, “normal fluctuation 4 s”, “normal fluctuation 6 s”, “normal fluctuation 8 s”, and “normal fluctuation 12 s” particularly belong to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “outside” which is not selected at the time of hitting (hereinafter referred to as “outside”). This may be referred to as a "falling variation pattern."

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery at the time of a miss is performed using a different variation pattern table for each of the miss types (los 1, 2 and 3), regardless of the special figures 1 and 2 (see FIG. 29).
Here, in the present embodiment, the selection rate (the rate at which the type is selected) by the symbol lottery is different for each of the types of “losing 1”, “losing 2”, and “losing 3”. "Has the highest selection rate, and" outside 2 "and" outside 3 "have a lower selection rate than" outside 1 ". Specifically, in the present example, the selectivity of “outside 1” is “190/200”, and the selectivity of “outside 2” and “outside 3” is respectively “5/200”. In this case, if the big hit determination result is “out”, “outside 1” is selected as the outage type in most cases.

  As the variation pattern lottery for the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery in the case of the loss type being “losion 1” is not a lottery according to the set value Ve, but a lottery according to the number of reserved balls. For this reason, among the variation pattern tables for the special figure 1, the variation pattern table used when the loss type is “losion 1” is common among the set values Ve, but is different for each number of reserved balls. Is prepared.

In the variation pattern lottery of Tokuzu 1 in the case of “outside 1”, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are five types of “normal variation 4 s”, “normal variation 6 s”, “normal variation 8 s”, “normal variation 12 s”, and “normal reach”. In this example, the variation pattern to be drawn is made different according to the number of reserved balls.
Specifically, when the number of reserved balls = 0, “normal fluctuation 12 s” and “normal reach” are set. When the number of reserved balls = 1, “normal fluctuation 8 s” and “normal reach” are set. When the number of reserved balls = 3, “normal fluctuation 4 s” and “normal reach” are set as the fluctuation patterns of the lottery target, respectively.

Here, in the variation pattern table, the values stored for each variation pattern to be drawn are determined based on the assumption that the variation pattern determination random number can take 200 values from 0 to 199. Values (values indicating distribution). For example, in the variation pattern table for Tokuzu 1, in the table of “losing 1” and “number of reserved balls = 0”, the storage value for “normal variation 12 s” = “160”, and the storage value for “normal reach” = “40” This means that the winning probability of “normal fluctuation 12 s” is “160/200” and the winning probability of “normal reach” is “40/200”.
The above allocation values are shown as stored values in the table for the sake of convenience of explanation only. In the actual variation pattern table, a determination reference value as used in the above-described jackpot random number determination is stored. become. For example, in the case of the above table of “missing 1” and “number of reserved balls = 0”, for example, “159” is stored as an actual stored value (judgment reference value). In this case, the random number for the fluctuation pattern is 159 or less. If so, "normal fluctuation 12s" is selected, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is larger than 159, "normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution values shown in FIG. 29, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “outside 1”, “normal fluctuation” is more easily selected than “normal reach”. (The appearance rate is set to be high).
In addition, in the variation pattern lottery in Tokuzu 1 corresponding to the case of “losing 1”, a normal variation pattern having a shorter variation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

  Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery in each of the types “losing 2” and “losing 3” is a lottery according to the set value Ve, while depending on the number of reserved balls. Not a draw. For this reason, as the variation pattern table for the special figure 1 used in each of “losing 2” and “losing 3”, a common table is used for the number of reserved balls, but a different table is prepared for each set value Ve. I have.

In the variation pattern lottery of Tokuzu 1 corresponding to the case of “losing 2” and “losing 3”, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are “super reach 1,” “super reach 2,” “super reach 3,” and “super reach 4.” Seeds.
In the present example, for the variation pattern lottery of Tokuzu 1 corresponding to the case of “missing 3”, the variation pattern targeted for the lottery is varied depending on the set value Ve.
More specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of Tokuzu 1, the variation patterns to be randomly selected for each combination of “outside 2” and “outside 3” and settings 1, 2, and 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and “outside 2” = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and "Outside 3" = Super Reach 1
Setting 2 and “outside 2” = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and “outside 3” = super reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and “outside 2” = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and "miss 3" = super reach 4

According to the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in this example, as the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “outside 2”, in the case of the setting 1, the fluctuation is in the order of super reach 4, 3, 2, 1 The pattern is easily selected. In the case of setting 2, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4 and in the case of setting 3, the changing pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4. Making it easier.
Further, in this example, as for the fluctuation pattern lottery of Tokuzu 1 corresponding to the case of “missing 3”, the higher the setting is (the larger the set value Ve is), the more the super reach having a high expectation of winning is likely to be selected. Like that.

  As in the case of the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the case of “missing 2”, the variation pattern table used for the lottery in which the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are three or more types includes a plurality of values ( The value represented by “number of variation patterns of lottery candidates−1” is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the setting 1 and “miss 2” in the drawing, for example, the first value = 9, the second value = 39, and the third value = 99 as the determination reference values, respectively. In this case, if the random number for the variation pattern is equal to or smaller than the first value, “Super Reach 1” is set. If the random number is larger than the first value and equal to or smaller than the second value, “Super Reach 2” is set. If the value is larger than the third value and equal to or smaller than the third value, “Super Reach 3” is selected, and if the value is larger than the third value, “Super Reach 4” is selected.

Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery in the case where the loss type is “loss 1” is different from the special pattern 1 in that the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is “normal fluctuation 12s” only. I have. Therefore, in the variation pattern table for the special figure 2, “missing 1” and “number of reserved balls = 0”, “missing 1” and “number of reserved balls = 1”, “missing 1” and “number of reserved balls = In each of the tables used when “2”, “missing 1” and “number of reserved balls = 3”, the distribution values corresponding to “normal fluctuation 12 s” are all “200”.
In this case, since the lottery result is the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variation pattern table may be a common table between the number of reserved balls.

  Further, as the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery in the case where the loss type is “loss 2” or “loss 3” is a lottery according to the set value Ve as in the case of the special figure 1, The lottery will not be performed according to the number of pending balls. For this reason, as for the variation pattern table for the special figure 2, the variation pattern table used in each of “losing 2” and “losing 3” is common to the number of reserved balls, but differs for each set value Ve. A table is provided.

In the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 2 corresponding to the case of “losing 2” and “losing 3”, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are two types of “normal variation 12s” and “super reach 4”, and depending on the set value Ve. , Any one of these “normal fluctuation 12s” and “super reach 4” fluctuation patterns is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of Tokuzu 2 corresponding to the case of “outside 2” and “outside 3” in the present example, “normal fluctuation 12s” is always selected when it is one of the settings 1 and 2. In the case of setting 6, “super reach 4” is selected.

Next, the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting, different tables are used for each of the special figures 1 and 2 for each hit type.
In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the lottery target is set as follows for each hit type. That is, when the hit type is “normal 4R”, the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is “normal change per”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, “super reach 3”, “super reach 4” in both special figures 1 and 2. 5 types.
When the hit type is “normal 6R”, in the special figure 1, the lottery target change patterns are “normal change hit”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, “super reach 3”, and “super reach 4”. In the special figure 2, there are four types of “super reach 1,” “super reach 2,” “super reach 3,” and “super reach 4,” excluding “per normal fluctuation.”
Further, when the hit type is “probable change 6R” or “probable change 10R”, the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is “super reach 1,” “super reach 2,” “super reach 3,” or “super reach 4” in both special figures 1 and 2. There are four types.

  In the variation pattern lottery at the time of hit according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific hit type. Specifically, for the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit type of “normal 4R” and “probable variation 10R”. A variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of 4R, 6R, and 10R.

Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of “normal 4R”, the variation pattern of the lottery target is made different depending on the set value Ve in both of FIGS. Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to “Normal 4R” in this example, five types of “normal variation per” to “super reach 4” are set for setting 1, and “super reach 4” for setting 2 or setting 6. Reach 1 "to" super reach 4 "are each set as a variation pattern of a lottery target.
Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of “Regular R6”, “probable variation 6R”, and “probability variation 10R” which are the hit types other than “normal 4R”, the variation pattern of the lottery target is set to Ve in both of FIGS. It is not changed.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of “normal 4R” and “probable variation 10R”. For this reason, in the hit variation pattern table of the special figure 1, as the variation pattern table used in the case of “normal 4R” and “probable variation 10R”, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the variation pattern table of the special figure 1, in each of the tables of “normal 4R” and “probable variation 10R”, the larger the set value Ve is, the larger the set value Ve is. I'm making it big. As a result, when the “normal 4R” and the “probable change 10R” are hit, the higher the current setting is, the easier it is to select the change pattern with the highest expected winning value as the change pattern of the special figure 1.

  Further, in the present example, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed for the “normal 4R”, the “probable variation 10R”, and the “probability variation 6R”. For this reason, in the hit variation pattern table of FIG. 2, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of “normal 4R”, “probable variation 6R”, and “probability variation 10R”. In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table of Tokujin 2, in all of these “normal 4R”, “probable change 6R”, and “probable change 10R”, the distribution value for “super reach 4” is increased as the set value Ve increases. .

  Here, as can be understood by referring to the distribution values in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for “super reach 4” is the largest in each table regardless of the hit type and the set value Ve. That is, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery when it is determined to be a big hit, the variation pattern with the highest expectation of winning is most easily selected.

The description returns to FIG.
In the above-described selection processing in step S1706, a change pattern is selected based on the above-described out-of-touch or hit change pattern table.
More specifically, if a deviation variation pattern table is selected in step S1702 in response to the determination that the deviation is determined, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the deviation type, the number of retained balls, and the set value Ve from the variation pattern table. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the variation pattern random number. If the hit variation pattern table is selected in response to the determination in step S1702 that the hit is a hit, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the hit type and the set value Ve from the corresponding variation pattern table, and selects the selected variation pattern table. A variation pattern is selected based on the table and the variation pattern random numbers. At this time, it goes without saying that the table for the special figure 1 and the table for the special figure 2 are selected and separated according to which of the special figures 1 and 2 is the processing target.
As can be understood from the above description, in each of the change pattern tables of hit / miss, one or a plurality of determination reference values (number of change patterns of lottery candidates-1) corresponding to the change pattern of the lottery target are determined. In the selection processing in step S1706, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the variation pattern random number.

Note that, in the above description, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern has been described as an example in which the table is divided for each set value Ve, but a common table may be used for some set values Ve.
FIG. 31 shows an example.
Here, a modified example of the hit variation pattern table on the assumption that the set value Ve can take six values corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 is shown.
In the example of FIG. 31, a table corresponding to “Normal 4R” and “Probable change 10R” for Tokuzu 1 and a table corresponding to “Normal 4R”, “Probable change 6R” and “Probable change 10R” for Tokuzu 2 are respectively set. An example is shown in which a table is divided for each of groups 1 to 3 and groups of settings 4 to 6.
As in the example of FIG. 31, in performing the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, it is not limited to separately dividing the table for each of the set values Ve, but is common to some set values Ve. May be used.

Subsequently, a process when a setting error is detected at the time of the variation pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that there is a setting error, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects a common variation pattern table at the time of setting error, and executes the selection processing of step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of a setting error common variation pattern table.
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of the setting error performed using the common variation pattern table at the time of the setting error, the shift variation pattern is forcibly selected regardless of the hitting / losing of both special figures 1 and 2. So that In other words, in this example, any one of the normal fluctuation 4s, the normal fluctuation 6s, the normal fluctuation 8s, and the normal fluctuation 12s is selected.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of a setting error in this example, a different variation pattern is selected for the special figure 1 depending on the number of reserved balls, and a specific variation pattern is selected for the special figure 2 regardless of the number of reserved balls. Only, specifically, only the “normal fluctuation 12 s” is selected.
On the special figure 1 side, a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 32 shows a table structure in which sorting values corresponding to a case where the random number for variation pattern lottery can take a value of 0 to 199 are shown. As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure in which a determination reference value is associated with at least a variation pattern of a lottery candidate is adopted.
If the specific variation pattern is selected on the special figure 2 side irrespective of the number of reserved balls as in this example, there is no need to divide the table for each reserved ball number (0 to 3). Needless to say.

  In FIG. 28, in the selection processing in step S1706, when the setting error common variation pattern table is selected in step S1705, the variation pattern is selected based on the table and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the setting error common variation pattern table is selected, and the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the selected table and the variation pattern random number is determined. A variation pattern is selected based on the comparison result.

The CPU 201 ends the variation pattern lottery process of step S1508 in response to executing the selection process of step S1706. By the end of the lottery process in step S1504, the change management process in step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 ends, and thereafter the process proceeds to step S1410 (change flag ON process) shown in FIG.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 following step S1410, the “variation pattern designation command” representing the lottery result of the variation pattern and the “decorative design designation command” representing the symbol lottery result are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. You.
On the effect control unit 24 side, based on these commands, a combination of decorative symbols when forming the reach state (a symbol type having the reach symbol as a constituent element) and a decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol). Are determined, and a lottery or the like of a preview effect corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, if a setting error is recognized at the start of the change of the special figure, the off-variation pattern (normal variation) is forcibly selected. If the intense heat fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation on the side, the player is confused, so in this example, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time such as the normal fluctuation 4s to the normal fluctuation 12s is selected as described above. I have.
In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24 also devises not to perform a notice effect at the time of a setting error. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives a setting value abnormality command for notifying a setting error (see step S1104 in FIG. 20) from the main control unit 20, the lottery of the announcement effect is not performed. You.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is recognized based on the above setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 displays a message such as “RAM is abnormal, please call a clerk” on the liquid crystal display device 36. The occurrence of an abnormality is notified, for example, by displaying an image including the symbol. The notification is not limited to the notification by the image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, but may be, for example, the notification by sound (and / or blinking) of the LED, or a set of a plurality of types of effect means such as an image, a sound, and an LED. The notification can also be made by matching.

In the above description, with respect to the common variation pattern table at the time of a setting error on the special figure 1, the normal variation pattern having a longer variation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases, but this is an example. It is also possible to select a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 33, the same variation pattern may be selected for each number of reserved balls as in the special figure 2 side. The example of FIG. 33 shows a case where “normal fluctuation 12 s” is commonly selected for each number of reserved balls.
As described above, in the setting error-time common variation pattern table, the relationship between the number of reserved balls and the variation pattern to be selected can be variously considered, and is not limited to a specific relationship.
It should be noted that, also on the special figure 2 side, the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls can be different, as in the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of the setting value related data table as the embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the random number determination table for big hit determination shown in FIG. 27A, an area below the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) of the out-of-office correspondence information is set as an empty area. Also, in this example, in the big hit determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27B, the area lower than the storage area (“4148” to “4150”) of the out-of-office correspondence information is set as an empty area. In this example, “0” is stored in these empty areas.
In these big hit determination random number determination tables, the area other than the empty area can be translated into a use data storage area in which use data used for controlling the progress of the game operation is stored. In addition, the free area can be referred to as an unused data storage area in which unused data not used for controlling the progress of the game operation is stored.

  In the present embodiment, when such a big hit determination random number determination table is a first data table including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set value Vd, The ROM 202 stores the first data table and a second data table that is stored in a lower storage area than the first data table and does not include the setting value related information.

FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a storage example of the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment.
As shown in the figure, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, a special symbol creation address table, that is, a second data not including the set value related information is stored in a storage area lower than the first data table (the big hit determination random number determination table). The table is stored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table including the plurality of set value related information, and the set value related information stored in the lower storage area than the first data table are stored. A second data table that does not include the second data table is stored.The first data table includes a use data storage area in which use data used for controlling the progress of the game operation is stored, and unused data that is not used for controlling the progress of the game operation. And a stored unused data storage area.

If only the used data storage area is reserved in the first data table including the set value related information, when the number of set values Vd to be used (the number of stages) is to be increased, the set value of the increase When the set value related information relating to Vd is added to the first data table, the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer needs to be shifted to the lower layer side. In other words, data after the second data table is forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When it is attempted to increase the number of set values Vd to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table including the set value related information as described above, It is possible to store the set value related information relating to the set value Vd of the increment in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it is not necessary to rewrite the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the load of the data rewriting work caused by changing the number of setting values Vd to be used.

In the present embodiment, the use data storage area stores use data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd (in this example, “3”) that can be set in the setting change process, The storage area stores unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process (“3” corresponding to the set values Ve “3”, “4”, and “5” in this example). Have been. Specifically, in this example, the capacity not used according to the set values Ve of “3”, which is obtained by subtracting the number of set values Ve actually used = 3 from the number of set values Ve that can be set in a rule = 6 The data is to be stored.
Thereby, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure the storage capacity of the set value related information relating to the increased set value Ve when the number of used set values Ve is increased. .
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data from being rewritten after the second data table.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “0” is stored as the unused data as described above. However, even if the first data table is referred to by the unused set value Vd, the unused data is stored. It is possible to prevent the setting value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being materialized, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

In the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table is stored in a storage area lower than the second data table, and the second data table is stored in a storage area lower than the first data table. The data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowermost area of the normal data area. .
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 stores “normal program area”, “unused area”, “normal data area”, “unused area”, “measurement program area”, “ An unused area, a measurement data area, and an unused area are defined. The “normal program area” is an area in which a program related to general games is stored, and the “normal data area” is an area in which a data table relating to general games referred to based on the program in the “normal program area” is stored. is there. For example, the big hit determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the “normal data area”.
The "measurement program area" is an area in which a program related to display and measurement of performance information such as the normal ratio information described above is stored, and the "measurement data area" is referred to based on the "measurement program area" program. This is an area in which a data table related to display and measurement of performance information to be performed is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the set value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowermost layer area of the normal data area, the first data table becomes, for example, the above-described “special symbol creation address table” ( As shown in FIG. 34), the second data table is stored in a lower storage area than the second data table, and the second data table is not stored in a lower storage area than the first data table.

When the number of set values Vd to be used is increased by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the above-described manner, the contents of the first data table located at the lowest layer of the data area in the ROM 202 Can be rewritten, and it becomes unnecessary to rewrite the data portion on the lower layer side than the first data table.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the data rewriting operation caused by changing the number of the set values Vd to be used.

<5. Processing of effect control unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, processing of the effect control unit 24 will be described. First, an example of the structure of scenario data for effect control will be described.
The structure of the scenario registration information will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A shows the structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and a sub-scenario. This scenario registration information is set using a work area provided in the RAM 243 (for example, a work memory for a built-in CPU) of the effect control unit 24.
In the present embodiment, the scenario registration information has 64 channels of scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. The scenarios registered in each scenario channel sCH can be executed simultaneously.

  As shown in the figure, information that can be registered in each scenario channel sCH includes a sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update process, a previous time (scPrevTm), and a sub-scenario execution line indicating an execution line of a sound / motor sub-scenario table. (ScIx), a sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) indicating an execution line of a ramp sub-scenario table, a main scenario timer (msTm) used for a scenario update process, a main scenario execution line (mcIx) indicating an execution line of a main scenario table, There are a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt) which is optional data that can be added to the main scenario, a user option (userFn), a standby time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum).

When the sound output by the speaker 46, the light emission by the optical display device 45a, and the effect by the driving of the movable object by the movable object motor 80c are started, the standby time (delay) and the main scenario number (mcNo) are set to the scenario channel sCH0. To the vacant scenario channel of ｓsCH63.
The waiting time (delay) indicates the time from the registration to the scenario channel sCH to the start of the scenario. The standby time (delay) is decremented by one at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later). When the standby time (delay) is 0, processing corresponding to the registered data is executed.

FIG. 39 shows an example of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the main scenario table. As the scenario of each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is described as time data in each line (line) of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can be described. . That is, in the main scenario table, a sub-scenario to be executed (and an option in some cases) is specified as the time by the main scenario timer (msTm). In the last line of the scenario, a scenario data end code D_SEEND or a scenario data loop code D_SELOP is described.
The value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by one at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later) from the start of the main scenario.
When the time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in a certain row elapses, the scenario table of each scenario number advances to the next row. The time data of each row indicates the timing at which the row ends.
For example, in the case of the scenario number 2, the operation of the sub-scenario number 2 is specified as the time of the timer value “1500”, the operation of the sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value “500”, and the next timer value “ The operation of the sub-scenario number 21 is designated as the time of 2000 ". The next line is the scenario data end code D_SEEND. In the case of the scenario data end code D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of the lamp data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, a scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, information indicating an effect operation (lighting pattern) by the light display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area (work area) of the RAM 243.
In this embodiment, the lamp data registration information has 16 lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Priority is set for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (ramp sub-scenario) registered in the ramp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. For example, if a scenario is registered in the ramp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in the ramp channel dwCH10 is executed with priority.
Note that the lamp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for lamp effects associated with BGM (Back Ground Music), the lamp channel dwCH15 is used for error-related lamp effects, and the lamp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for normal effects.

  The information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH includes, as shown in the figure, a registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the number of the registered lighting pattern, an execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the number of the lighting pattern to be executed, and a lamp sub-scenario. There are an offset (offset) indicating an execution line, an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum).

  FIG. 40A shows an example of lamp sub-scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the lamp sub-scenario table. As the lamp sub-scenario of each number, a value of time data (time) is described in each line (line) of the scenario, and a lamp channel and a lamp number indicating various lighting patterns are described. In the last line, a lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described.

In the ramp sub-scenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the time at which the line starts after the sub-scenario starts.
The main scenario timer (msTm) described above is compared with the time data in the table, and if they match, the lamp number of that line is registered in the lamp data registration information of FIG. 37B. The registered lamp channel dwCH is the channel indicated on the line.
For example, it is assumed that the scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered in the above-mentioned certain scenario channel sCH, and the sub-scenario number 2 is referred to. In lamp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, lamp channel 5 (dwCH5) and lamp number 5 are described on the first line as time data (time) = 0. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm) = 0, the information of the first line is registered as the registered lighting number (lmpNew) = 5 in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a registration for performing the lighting pattern operation of the lighting number 5 with a relatively low priority of the lamp channel dwCH5.
For the second line, similar processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches “500”. That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) = 6 (that is, the instruction of the lighting pattern of the lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
If the time data (time) has the same value in two consecutive lines, the processing for each line is started simultaneously.
In the lamp drive data creation process described later, the lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information updated in this manner.

Next, the structure of the motor data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. As the motor data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the motor data registration information has, for example, eight motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to eight motors.
The information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH includes an execution operation number (no), a registration operation number (noNew), an operation count (lcnt), an excitation counter (tcnt), an execution step (step), an operation line (Offset), parent (migration source) / child (migration destination) attributes (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), Current input information (currentSw), switch information on software (softSw), and count on software (softCnt).

  FIG. 40C shows an example of motor sub-scenario number 1 as a part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario of each number, a value of time data (time) is described in each line (line) of the scenario, and information of a motor, a solenoid / user option is described. In the last line, a scenario data end code D_MSEND is described.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is initially 0), the value of the time data (time) of this motor sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). I do. Note that the time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). Therefore, the time data value to be set is (time data of the current line) − (time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3, 4 to 7) is configured to indicate the number of the motor operation pattern (number of a motor operation table described later) in one byte per motor. The operation pattern number is set in the registration operation number (noNew) and the execution operation number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
In step S2202 of FIG. 44 described later, the motor data registration information is updated, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows the sound data registration information. As the sound data registration information, information indicating the scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the sound data registration information has 16 sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
As shown in the figure, information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH includes a volume transition amount (frzVq), a volume (frzVl), a transition amount change (rsv2), a volume change (rsv1), a phrase change (rsv0), and a stereo (frzSt). ), Loop (frzLp), phrase number hi (frzHi), and phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows an example of sound sub-scenario numbers 1 and 2 as a part of the sound sub-scenario table. As the sound / motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line (line) of the scenario, and information of BGM, notice sound, error sound, and sound control is described. In the last line, a scenario data end code D_SEEND is described.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is initially 0), the value of the time data (time) of this sound sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). I do. Note that the time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). Therefore, the time data value to be set is (time data of the current line) − (time data of the previous line).
The BGM data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as a BGM phrase number and a volume value, and is set to the sound channel aCH0 (and aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. .
The notice sound data of the line is composed of information registered in sound data registration information such as a notice sound phrase number and a volume value, and is set in a vacant place of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information registered in sound data registration information such as a phrase number and a volume value of the error sound, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data is channel information in the lower 6 bytes and control information in the upper 2 bytes.
In step S2033 in FIG. 41 described later, the reproduction output control is performed based on the scenario update processing and the updated sound data registration information.

  The sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have an integrated table structure for each line of time.

FIG. 41 illustrates an example of processing of the effect control unit 24 that performs effect control using the above-described scenario data structure, in particular, a process of the CPU 241.
The CPU 241 starts the processing in FIG. 41 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs necessary initialization processing before the start of the game operation. For example, initialization processing includes initialization of an interface system, interrupt setting, initialization of an external memory, initialization of a WDT, initialization processing and control of a movable body starting point, initialization of a sound source control, initialization of a serial output controller. , Scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler), system timer initialization, liquid crystal control initialization, etc.
Each scheduler indicates the above-described scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information, or progress of scenario control based on these. In the initialization processing, a work area for storing such scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

After completing the initial setting process in step S2000, the CPU 241 executes power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for holding, in the RAM 243, information necessary for displaying a setting history confirmation screen Gs described later, which is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36. Although details will be described later, predetermined history information such as change history information of the set value Ve is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
Starting from the power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001, the process as an embodiment executed by the CPU 241 when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs will be described again.

The CPU 241 repeatedly performs the processes in and after step S2002 in response to the execution of the process in step S2001.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processing after step S2002 while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36. In this example, control based on a V blank signal, which is a synchronization signal used particularly for display control, is performed.
In the present embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 second (33.3 ms), which is one frame period of the display image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter according to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter is counted up every 1/60 second (16.6 ms).
Of course, each processing of the CPU 241 is performed based on a processing clock having a frequency much higher than the frequency of the V blank signal. Each process in FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the start to the end of the frame according to the V blank signal. At the start of the frame, the process is performed once in steps S2004 to S2006, and thereafter, the V blank is performed. Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of one frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. When the end of one frame period is detected, the processing of steps S2050 to S2052 is performed.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control on the WDT circuit included in the effect control unit 24.
In subsequent step S2003, CPU 241 checks the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing a scheduler update or the like in a frame period.
At the start of a certain frame of display data, the frame update flag is turned off (to be turned off at the end of the frame in step S2052 described later).
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2003 to S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the frame of the scenario scheduler. Specifically, this is processing for updating the standby time (delay), main scenario timer (msTm), and sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information in FIG. 37A. In other words, it can be said that the effect scenario timer is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.
Then, the CPU 241 turns on the frame update flag in a succeeding step S2005. This is information indicating that the timer of the scenario has been advanced in the current frame.
The CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, and sound data registration information) have not been updated with the progress of the timer.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After clearing the WDT circuit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2020 because the frame update flag is ON in step S2003. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset if the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

  As described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once for the first time after the frame start timing, and in step S2004, the timer of the scenario registration information is updated. The scenario for the performance proceeds every 33.3 ms, which is one frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3 ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the time of the value to be described × 33.3 ms. In addition, the time of one row indicated by the time (time) in the sub-scenario table in FIG.

In step S2020, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter has not reached “2” (that is, if it is “0” or “1”), the flow proceeds to step S2021.
The V blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051, and is incremented twice in one frame. Therefore, V blank interrupt counter = 0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and V blank interrupt counter = 1 indicates the second half period of the frame. With the V blank signal at the end of the frame, V blank interrupt counter = 2.
During the frame period in which the V blank interrupt counter is “0” or “1”, the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2020 to S2021 to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible.

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is “0” or “1”. That is, whether the present is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
At present, if the V blank interrupt counter is 0, that is, if it is the first half of the frame, the flow advances to step S2022 to check the received command from the main control unit 20. That is, it is determined whether one or more received commands are stored in the command receiving buffer. If there is no reception command, the process proceeds to step S2030.
If there is one or more received commands, the CPU 241 performs a command analysis process in step S2023.

  Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. It should be noted that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that if a command is received during the current frame period even if the scheduler update flag was once turned on in step S2031, the command is received again. Means to turn off.

An example of the command analysis processing in step S2023 will be described with reference to FIGS.
As described above, in step S2022 of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 checks whether or not the effect control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer. If the effect control command is stored, the command Is read out in the processing of FIG.

In the effect control unit 24, a command reception buffer that captures the effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 is prepared in the RAM 243.
First, in step S2101 in FIG. 42, the CPU 241 checks a read pointer indicating a read address of the command reception buffer and a write pointer indicating a write address.
The light pointer is updated in response to the command reception, and the received effect control command is stored in the address indicated by the light pointer in response to the update. The read pointer is updated when reading from the command reception buffer is performed (step S2102). Therefore, if the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, it means that the effect control command that has not been read yet is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer is not the write pointer, the process proceeds to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1-byte command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command receiving buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

  Actually, the determination of the presence or absence of the received command in step S2022 in FIG. 41 can also be made based on whether or not the read pointer = write pointer. As an actual program, if the read pointer is equal to the write pointer when the process first proceeds to the command check process, it may be determined that there is no received command in step S2022 in FIG.

As described above, one effect control command is formed of two bytes, one byte as a mode and one byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 checks whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed based on the value of Bit 7 out of 8 bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7).
If the mode is the mode, the process proceeds to step S2104 as a process of receiving the upper data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register “command HI byte”. Also, the “command LO byte” register is cleared. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Subsequently, if the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, an effect control command that has not been read yet is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2102, where the CPU 241 is indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. Loads 1-byte command data from the address. Also, the read pointer is incremented.
If the read command is an event, the process proceeds from step S2103 to S2105 as a process of receiving lower-order data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register “command LO byte”.

By saving the mode and event command data in the registers “command HI byte” and “command LO byte”, the CPU 241 has acquired one command.
Thus, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs a process according to the fetched command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The read pointer is equal to the write pointer when there is no effect control command that has not yet been captured by the CPU 241 in the command reception buffer. When the read pointer = write pointer is confirmed in step S2101, the command analysis processing as step S2023 in FIG. 41 ends.

An example of the command corresponding process in step S2106 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 43A shows a basic process as a command corresponding process. In response to receiving the 2-byte effect control command, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2121 in FIG. 43A whether or not the current mode is the test mode. If it is in the test mode, in step S2122, all effect scenarios are cleared, sound output is stopped, and the LED on the light display device 45a is turned off. Then, the test mode ends in step S2123.
If not in the test mode, these processes are not performed.
Then, in step S2130, CPU 241 performs processing for the captured effect control command.

  The effect control commands include, for example, a variation pattern designation command for a special symbol, a decoration symbol designation command, a hold addition command, a game state designation command, a power-on command, a RAM clear command, a setting change command, a setting change end command, and a setting change confirmation command. Command, a setting confirmation end command, a setting value command (transmitted by the main control unit 20 at least at the time of activation (S808 in FIG. 17) or at the start of symbol variation (S1411 in FIG. 23)), and an error command (various errors Notification command) ... etc. In step S2130, CPU 241 performs a process specified by the program according to the received command. Here, the specific processing is illustrated by giving four effect control commands to FIGS. 43B to 43E.

FIG. 43B shows a process S2130a when a variation pattern designation command is fetched as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of setting a decorative symbol designating command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the CPU 241 controls the variable display of symbols by sequentially receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command.

FIG. 43C shows a process S2130b when a symbol designating command is fetched as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first checks in step S <b> 2132 whether the variation pattern designation command has been received. If not received, the process ends.
If the variation pattern designating command has already been received when the decorative pattern designating command is received, the process proceeds to step S2133, and first, a scenario registration for the operation of the accessory origin correction is performed. Then, in a step S2134, a symbol variation flag is set. The symbol variation flag is provided corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and each flag indicates a variation state. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol variation flag FZ1, a second special symbol variation flag FZ2, and a normal symbol variation flag FZ3 are prepared, and each of them indicates that the symbol is changing, stopped (hit), or stopped (missing). Here, at the start of the change, the corresponding symbol change flag (one of FZ1, FZ2, FZ3) is set to a value indicating “during change”.
The symbol variation flag is set to a value indicating "stopping (hit)" for a predetermined time at the end of the symbol variation in the case of a hit, and thereafter, a value indicating "stopping (losing)" until the symbol variation starts. Is set to
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs a fluctuation start process. After that, the change pattern designation command is deleted in step S2136 according to the start of the change.

FIG. 43D shows a process S2130c when a power-on command is fetched as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of clearing the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, it clears the storage areas such as the contents of the command reception / transmission buffer and the various operation input information buffers.
In step S2138, an error release command is transmitted. In step S2139, the accessory error information is cleared. In step S2140, the accessory operation is stopped. In step S2141, a power-on scenario is registered. Set commands sequentially.

FIG. 43E shows processing S2130d in the case where a RAM clear command is fetched as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of clearing the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, it clears the storage areas such as the contents of the command reception / transmission buffer and the various operation input information buffers.
In step S2144, an error release command is transmitted, and in step S2145, a RAM clear error set and an error notification timer are set. Further, in step S2146, information about the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, information about the scenario is cleared. In step S2148, a power-on initial display (RAM clear) command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

The example of the processing according to the command reception has been described above.
The processing of steps 2022 to S2024 in FIG. 41 as the processing corresponding to the command reception described above is started to be executed only during the period of V blank interrupt counter = 0 in this example.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 checks the scheduler update flag in step S2030 in FIG. 41 and branches the processing. Here, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the start of the frame, the process of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed when the process first proceeds to step S2030 in the current frame period. Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed even when a command is received.

The CPU 241 performs a process of executing a scenario scheduler in step S2032. This is an update process of the scenario registration information. For example, among the information registered in the scenario channel sCH, when the standby time (delay) is 0, a process corresponding to the registered data is executed. That is, processing is performed according to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), the sub-scenario execution line (scIx), the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), and the like are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 performs sound scheduler execution and output processing. This is a process of updating the sound data registration information according to the sound sub-scenario specified in the scenario table, and a process of outputting a sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller of the effect control unit 24 to execute sound output according to the current scenario progress.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 performs a ramp scheduler execution process.
This is a process of updating the lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following processing for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, the main scenario timer (msTm) is compared with the time data (time) in the ramp sub-scenario table. The time data (time) in the ramp sub-scenario table indicates the time at which the line (sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) starts. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is equal to or longer than the time data (time), the processing for that line is performed.
For example, first, it is determined whether or not the current line is a line in which a lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described. If it is not the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and the lamp number described in the line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
In addition, a registered lighting number (lmpNew) and an effective lighting number (lmpNo) are set in an area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number acquired from the line in the lamp sub-scenario table is set to the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and “0” is set to the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Further, the value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is incremented by one. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to a state where the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

  In step S2034, the above-described update of the lamp data registration information is performed. The lamp drive data generation and the lamp drive data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in steps S2041 and S2042.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter is "0", the processing of steps S2041 to S2043 is executed, and if "1", these processings are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates lamp drive data. That is, based on the information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of the lamp data registration information, the lamp driving data to be actually output to the driver for driving various LEDs is generated.
In step S2042, control is performed so that the generated lamp drive data is output to the driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs a key event process. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The processes of creating and outputting the lamp drive data in steps S2041 and S2042 are started only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0. That is, these processes are started only during the first half of the frame.

  After V blank interrupt counter = 2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020: = 2), the CPU 241 performs processing corresponding to the end of the frame after step S2050.

  First, the CPU 241 executes a history display process in step S2050. This history display processing is processing for displaying the above-described setting history confirmation screen Gs on the liquid crystal display device 36. The details will be described later.

  In response to executing the display processing in step S2050, the CPU 241 clears the V blank interrupt counter in step S2051, turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as described above, processing for a new frame period is performed.

In addition to the above-described processing in FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the processing in FIG. That is, the process in FIG. 44 is a process executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of the display data.
44, in step S2200, the CPU 241 performs a WDT pulse generation process. The WDT circuit counts every 1 ms using the WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs a motor sensor update process. This is a process of detecting the information of the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs a device scheduler execution process. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. In step S2203, output processing of motor drive data to the driver of the movable object motor 80c is performed as device scheduler output processing.
That is, the CPU 241 controls the motor operation every 1 ms, which is about 1/30 of the frame period.

In subsequent step S2204, CPU 241 performs a key input process. That is, a signal corresponding to the operation of various operation elements such as the effect button 13 is confirmed.
The CPU 241 ends the interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 in response to executing the process of step S2204.

Although the processing example of the CPU 241 has been described so far, in the above processing example, the CPU 241 performs various processing in accordance with the frame of the display data.
FIG. 45 shows various timings of display data for each frame period.
Each frame of the display data is referred to as a frame FR0, FR1, FR2,. For example, the display of the frame FR0 is performed at time T0 to T1, and the display of the frame FR1 is performed at time T1 to T2.
Since the value of the V blank interrupt counter is cleared in step S2051 in FIG. 41, it becomes “0” at the start of the frame and “1” at the middle of the frame (time T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in FIG. Cleared immediately after 2 ".

  In the figure, “SL” represents a frame period, and “SLs” represents a start timing of the frame period (hereinafter, referred to as “frame start timing SLs”). “CA” means the first half of the frame.

First, as a premise, the drawing process of display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 based on a liquid crystal control command from the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed during the time points T0 to T1, which is the display period of the frame FR0.
In the liquid crystal control unit 40, preload of data used for drawing is performed. This preload is executed in a period one frame before the drawing process as preparation for drawing. For example, the preload for drawing the display data of the frame FR2 is executed within the time period T0 to T1, which is the display period of the frame FR0.
Note that the drawing processing and the preload start timing are synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown in the figure.

On the side of the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241), during the frame period indicated by SL, the processing of the repeated steps S2021 to S2043 is performed.
However, the reception command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only in the first half period CA of the frame. This is because these are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0.
The received command analysis process is a process as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43. This process is a process that requires a relatively heavy processing load, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the command type, it may be necessary to perform a lottery or the like for an effect. In the present embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half period of the frame.
For this reason, as for the command signal, for example, a command signal received during a period indicated by a broken line as time T0m to T1m is subjected to command analysis during a period from time T1 to T1m.

The ramp data creation / output processing (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only in the first half period CA of the frame. This is because these are also executed only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0.

[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function of displaying a history related to an operation related to the set value Ve (Vd) as a set operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, a history related to the change of the set value Ve and a history related to confirmation of the set value Ve (setting confirmation processing) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of a setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 based on the control of the effect control unit 24. In this example, as shown in FIG. Information indicating its contents and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and time by hour and minute) is included.
The "content" of the target event corresponds to the name information of the type of the target event (that is, "setting change") and the set value Ve after the change (the set value Vd completed by the setting change process) for the setting change. And numerical information of the set value Ve). The setting confirmation includes name information of the type of the target event (that is, “setting confirmation”) and numerical information of the setting value Ve at the time of setting confirmation (that is, the setting value Ve confirmed by the user).

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example is composed of a plurality of pages, and specifically, can display five pages. In this example, the number of pieces of history information that can be displayed on one page is ten. Therefore, a maximum of 50 pieces (10 × 5) pieces of history information can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3). For example, each time one of the direction keys of the cross key 16 is pressed once, page feed for one page is performed.

In the setting history confirmation screen Gs, display numbers are given to respective pieces of history information. In the case of this example, “1” is assigned to this display number for the latest history, and numbers are assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
Further, the current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (the maximum number of pages is also indicated like "1/5" in the figure).

  Although not shown in FIG. 46, the target events of the history display in this example include various errors in addition to the setting change and the setting confirmation described above. The errors here include, for example, various errors other than the set value error, such as a door opening error, a replenishment error, and a ball clogging error.

  The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation being performed in a predetermined state. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 13 during the setting confirmation (during the execution of the setting confirmation processing in step S109). Here, as will be understood from the above description, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the opening of the front frame 2 and the operation of the setting key when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The display of the confirmation screen Gs is assumed to be performed in such a state that the front frame 2 is opened at the time of the start-up.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during the setting confirmation. The setting confirmation screen is started to be displayed in response to the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receiving the setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
The setting confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen Gs along with information for notifying the user such as the hall staff that the setting is being confirmed (in the figure, the character “Setting is being confirmed”). (In the figure, the characters of “setting history list”, the icon of the effect button 13 and the character of “determined”) are displayed.

Here, in this example, the operation guidance for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during the setting confirmation as described above, and the user follows the operation guidance. In response to performing a predetermined operation (in this example, operation of the effect button 13), the screen transits to a setting history confirmation screen Gs illustrated in FIG.
In other words, it can be said that the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the display instruction of the setting history confirmation screen Gs while displaying the operation guidance on the notification screen during the setting confirmation.
Accordingly, the user can grasp two pieces of information of the timing at which the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operation required to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs only by the process of displaying the setting confirmation screen. it can. That is, the processing load for presenting information that needs to be notified to the user when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is reduced.

In addition, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of the present example can transit to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information. For example, even if the number of stored pieces of history information is “8” as shown in FIG. 46, all pages from the second page to the fifth page can be displayed according to the page switching operation. In other words, it is possible to display all pages including no blank information, that is, empty pages.
This allows the user to intuitively grasp the maximum number of histories that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
The history display information is information constructed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 accumulating history information corresponding to each occurrence of a history display target event in a predetermined area of the RAM 243.

In the work area of the RAM 243, an area for storing history display information (hereinafter, referred to as a "history storage area") is defined, and the CPU 241 executes processing described later (see FIGS. 52 and 53). Then, every time the target event occurs, the corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, the history information added one by one for each occurrence of the target event is referred to as “individual history information”. In this example, since up to 50 histories can be displayed, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area capable of storing 50 pieces of individual history information of histories 0 to 49. .

  As the individual history information, as shown in the figure, information of “year”, “month”, “hour”, “minute” necessary for displaying the date and time information of the history, and the type of the history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error) are shown. The information includes “type” information and “data” information. In the information of “data”, when the “type” is a setting change and a setting confirmation, information indicating the setting value Ve after the change due to the setting change and the setting value Ve whose setting has been confirmed are stored, and the information of “type” is stored. Is "error", information indicating an error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for the latest history position information are respectively provided in the first area, and an area subsequent to these areas is set as the storage area for the individual history information.
The checksum area is an area for storing a sum value calculated from storage information in the entire storage area for individual history information. The role of this sum value will be described later.
The latest history position information is information indicating the storage position of the individual history information added last on the RAM 243.

Here, since the information reading speed of the RAM 243 is relatively high, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs quickly.
However, the RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power supply, and cannot retain stored information when the power is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is assumed to be a history over a relatively long period, such as several weeks or one month. Therefore, only the RAM 243 is used as the history display information. If the storage destination memory is used, the history information is lost each time the power is turned off, and the history display cannot be performed properly.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. 3 (that is, a memory capable of holding storage information even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down) is provided as a memory accessible by the CPU 243. The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is backed up.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for describing an example of the backup operation of the history display information according to the embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas as areas for backing up the history display information. Specifically, two areas, a first history storage area and a second history storage area in the figure, are set.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244.

As described above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed while the setting is being confirmed (that is, immediately after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again). In other words, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. After. When the power is turned off, the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (cannot be held), so that when the CPU 241 starts up, the CPU 241 displays the history display backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244. The use information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243. Thereby, before the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed, it is possible to obtain a state in which the appropriate history display information is stored in the RAM 243.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243.
Thereby, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of appropriately and promptly displaying the setting operation history.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, a plurality of history storage areas such as the above-described first and second history storage areas are provided to perform a plurality of backups. And
By making a plurality of backups of the history display information in this way, it is possible to improve the display durability of the setting history confirmation screen Gs for the corruption of the stored data in the memory 244. That is, even if data corruption occurs in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed using the history display information of another history storage area. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation where proper history information display becomes impossible.

  Here, in this example, copying (backup) of the history display information to the memory 244 is performed every time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243. That is, in response to the addition of new individual history information to the history display information in the RAM 243 in response to the occurrence of the target event, the history display information after the addition is stored in the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244. Copy to each.

For example, it is conceivable to copy the history display information to the memory 244 at regular intervals. In this case, the power supply is cut off unexpectedly immediately after the latest individual history information is added (the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off). Occurs, the power is cut off without the latest history being reflected in the history display information in the memory 244. When the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup, the latest history may not be displayed. obtain.
On the other hand, if copying is performed each time a history is added as described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the storage contents of the history do not match between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to an unexpected power failure. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of display failure of the history information.

  Copying to the memory 244 each time individual history information is added is merely an example, and copying may be performed at another timing, for example, each time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. is there.

FIG. 50 illustrates an example of processing for adding individual history information in history display information.
In this example, the storage area of the individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area capable of holding 50 individual history information.
More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state where 50 pieces of histories t0 to t49 are stored as individual history information, a state in which individual history information as history t50 is to be newly added is set. Suppose.
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the above-described latest history position information is a storage position of the individual history information as the history t49 as shown in the figure.

In adding the individual history information as the history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of the history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the storage position of the individual history information indicated by the latest history position (that is, the history t0 is overwritten).
With this, when adding new individual history information in a state where the individual history information is held to the maximum, the oldest individual history information is overwritten by the latest individual history information, and as a result, in the history display data, The individual history information storage area holds the latest 50 pieces of individual history information from the latest. That is, the number of retained individual history information is not to exceed the upper limit (50 pieces required for display).

In this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored in the ring buffer mode.
When the individual history information is stored in the form of a ring buffer, the latest history position is managed, and the new or old order of each history information is naturally grasped by the storage position of each history information based on the latest history position. Will be done. Therefore, when displaying the history list in the new order or the oldest order as the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is not necessary to refer to the time information included in each history information to specify the newest order and the oldest order of each history information. . In other words, it is possible to reduce the processing load in displaying a list of histories in the new order or the oldest order.

Here, in the present example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is performed only on condition that the setting is being confirmed, and the setting history confirmation screen is being confirmed during the setting change (during the setting change process in step S115). The screen Gs is not displayed.
Since the setting value Ve can be changed during the setting change, displaying the history of the setting change during the setting change may undesirably cause confusion for the user.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused in displaying the history of the setting value Ve.

Subsequently, a process for realizing the operation related to the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the power-on history information initial setting process (S2001). This process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as a part of the effect control main process described with reference to FIG. 41. Specifically, the CPU 241 performs the steps The processing of S2001 is executed. As described above, the process in step S2001 is a process for storing information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the RAM 243.

  51, in step S2301, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information in the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243). Here, if the history display target event has occurred at a stage prior to the current activation, the history information updating process of step S2160 described later is performed on the memory 244 (FIG. 53: In particular, in step S2406, history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas. In the process of step S2301, the history display information of the first history storage area among the history display information stored in the memory 244 is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In step S2302, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the sum value of the first history storage area is abnormal (check sum process). That is, as described above, from the first history storage area to the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 (hereinafter referred to as “first history display information”), the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information , And determines whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area is calculated from the storage value in the storage area of the individual history information by the process of step S2405 in the history information update process of step S2160 (FIG. 53) when the history display information is backed up to the memory 244. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information matches or mismatches with the value at the time of backup by determining whether the sum value matches / mismatches in the checksum processing in step S2302. It is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality in the backed-up history information (for example, whether or not there is unauthorized rewriting).

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, the sum value is normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization processing in step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information of the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 is continued. That is, a history display process (FIG. 54) of step 2050 described later is executed based on the history information of the first history storage area held in the RAM 243 in this manner.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2302 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum value is abnormal, the CPU 241 performs processing of transferring the history display information in the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. . That is, the history display information of the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information of the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

  Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether the sum value of the second history storage area is abnormal. That is, as described above, the history display information (hereinafter referred to as “second history display information”) of the second history storage area stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 has the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information. , And determines whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the history information backed up in the second history storage area is abnormal.

  If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, the sum value is normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization processing in step S2001. That is, if the history information of the second history storage area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information of the second history storage area is held in the RAM 243 is continued. A history display process (FIG. 54) based on the history information is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2304 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum value is abnormal, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2305 to clear the history display information, and ends the initial setting process in step S2001. In the clearing process of step S2305, the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 is cleared together with the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a process for updating history information in response to the occurrence of a target event for history display.
The target events in this example are a setting change, a setting confirmation, and the occurrence of an error. The CPU 241 performs a process of updating history information in response to the occurrence of these events based on a production control command from the main control unit 20 side. Have been to run. Specifically, as for the setting change and the setting confirmation, the history information is updated in response to the reception of the setting change end command, the setting value command, and the setting confirmation command from the main control unit 20 (see FIG. 52A). For errors, the history information is updated in response to receiving various error commands from the main control unit 20 (see FIG. 52B).
In this example, each of the processes in FIGS. 52A and 52B is executed as one of the command processes (see FIG. 43) in step S2130 described above.

FIG. 52A illustrates a setting-related command process S2130e corresponding to a setting-related command that is a command related to setting change and setting confirmation.
First, the CPU 241 confirms whether any of the setting confirmation command, the setting confirmation end command, the setting change command, the setting change command, and the setting change end command has been received by the processing of steps S2150 to S2154.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether a setting confirmation command has been received. If a setting confirmation command has not been received, it is determined in step S2151 whether a setting confirmation end command has been received. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether a setting change command has been received. If the setting change command has not been received, it is determined in step S2153 whether a setting change command has been received. Is determined. If the setting change command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether a setting change end command has been received.

Here, in step S2150, the setting confirmation command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve as described with reference to FIG. 15, and in step S2150 in this example, the setting value “ It is determined whether a command including any one of the notification information of “1” to “6” has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying the set value Ve within the usable range Re but not within the usable range Ru has been received as the setting confirmation command.
Further, in the present example, the command for notifying the setting value Ve (“1” to “6”) in the usable range Re but not in the usable range Ru is similarly sent to the setting change command in step S2152. It is determined whether or not it has been received.
The significance of allowing a command notifying the value within the usable range Re but not within the usable range Ru of the command notifying the set value Ve will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values “1” to “6”) has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation scenario registration process in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
If it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes a setting confirmation end scenario registration process in step S2156, and proceeds to step S2159. In step S2152, the setting change command (setting value “1”) To "6"), the process directly proceeds to step S2159.
Further, if it is determined in step S2153 that the setting change command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change start scenario registration processing in step S2157, proceeds to step S2159, and determines that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154. In this case, a setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158, and the flow advances to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processing of steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, during the setting confirmation, the setting confirmation end, the setting change start, and the rendering operation corresponding to the setting change end are executed.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the specification / setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether any of the specification specification command and the setting value command has been received. Although the description by illustration is omitted, the specification specification command is information indicating the specification of the gaming machine 1 transmitted at the time of activation by the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 (for example, the winning probability of a big hit and the number of steps of the set value Ve to be used are set. This is a command for notifying such information as information to be displayed. The set value command is a command transmitted by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop pre-processing.
In both the specification designation command and the setting value command, the upper byte is set to a specific value representing the specification information of the gaming machine 1. In step S2159, it is determined whether or not a command in which the upper byte has the specific value is received. It is determined whether any of the specification specification command and the setting value command has been received.

  If neither the specification specification command nor the setting value command has been received and it is determined in step S2159 that the specification specification / setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing in step S2130e. That is, in this case, the process of storing the set value in the RAM 243 in step S2163 described below is not performed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the specification specification / setting information command has been received, the CPU 241 stores the specification information in the RAM 243. That is, the value of the upper byte of the received specification specification command or set value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.

  In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether the setting is indeterminate. That is, it is determined whether or not the received specification / setting information command is not a setting value command but a specification specification command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the specification specification command is “0FH”, and the lower byte of the set value command is a value corresponding to the set value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, whether or not the lower byte of the received specification / setting information command is “0FH” determines whether or not the specification / setting information command is a specification specification command instead of a setting value command. (Whether or not the setting is indeterminate).

When it is determined that the lower byte is not “0FH” and the setting is not indefinite (that is, the setting command), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2162, and determines whether the setting information is in the usable range Re. That is, it is determined whether or not the value indicated by the identification data of the set value Ve (see FIG. 16) included in the received set value command is within the range of “00” to “05” corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
If it is determined that the value indicated by the identification data is within the usable range Re and the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.
In response to executing the storage processing in step S2163, the CPU 241 advances the processing to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 passes the storage process in step S2163 and proceeds to step S2164.
If it is determined in step S2161 that the setting is indeterminate (that is, the command is a specification specification command), the CPU 241 passes the determination process in step S2162 and the storage process in S2163 and advances the process to step S2164.

  Note that the determination process of step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination process of the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20. When it is determined that the set value Ve is abnormal, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, the significance of determining, on the side of the effect control unit 24, whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re instead of the actual usable range Ru as the abnormality determination will be described later.

  In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether it is time to change the setting or confirm the setting. This determination is made, for example, when the command determined to have been received in the current setting value related command processing (S2130e) is the first “setting value command” after receiving the “setting change end command” or the “setting confirmation command”. Can be determined.

  If the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2165 to set the history type. That is, the value of “type” and the value of “data” described above are set for the individual history information to be newly added. Specifically, when the setting is changed, a value indicating “setting change” is set as the value of “type”, and a value indicating the current setting value Ve (setting value Ve that has been set) is set as the value of “data”. set. If the setting is confirmed, a value indicating “setting confirmation” as the value of “type” is set as the value of “data”, and the setting value Ve whose setting is confirmed (the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command). Set each.

In response to executing the set processing in step S2165, the CPU 241 executes history information update processing in step S2166.
The history information updating process in step S2166 will be described again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes a process of transmitting the setting value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, a process of transmitting information indicating the set value Ve notified by the set value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is performed. Thereby, the set value Ve notified by the set value command, such as the set value Ve set in the setting change process, can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
In response to executing the transmission processing in step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the processing in step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows the processing S2130f corresponding to the error command.
First, in step S2170, the CPU 241 performs error notification. That is, a notification process (a notification process using a predetermined effect unit) is executed according to the type of error specified from the received error command.

  Next, as the history type setting process in step S2171, the CPU 241 sets the value of “type” to a value representing “error” and the value of “data” to the error number (the value representing the error type) for the individual history information to be newly added. ), The history information updating process in step S2166 is executed, and the process in step S2130f ends.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the history information updating process in step S2166. The update process is a process of updating the history display information in the RAM 243 so that the individual history information according to the newly generated target event is added.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the latest history position information is within a specified range (that is, in this example, whether or not it is within a range of 0 to 49). If the latest history position information is not a value within the specified range (that is, 50 or more), the CPU 241 ends the update processing in step S2160. That is, in this case, since the latest history position information has an abnormality, the history display information is not updated.

  If the latest history position information is a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2402, and updates the latest history position information to a value of the next position. The update of the value of the latest history position information is performed within the range of 0 to 49, and as understood from the description of FIG. 42, if the value is “49”, the next position is updated. Is set to "0" (that is, the value is cyclically incremented within the range of 0 to 49).

  Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires time information (year, month, day, hour, and minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404, performs processing of saving history information in an area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, the individual history information including the acquired time information and the information of “type” and “data” set in the corresponding processing in steps S2165 and S2171 described in FIG. 52 above is stored in the RAM 243 indicated by the latest history position information. In the storage area.

  It is also possible to store (display) the energizing time since power-on as individual history information instead of the time information by RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine having no RTC function unit, it is possible to display, as history information, information capable of specifying the occurrence time of the target event.

  In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 performs a process of calculating the sum value of the history information of the internal work and storing it in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, a sum value is calculated from the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information including the individual history information newly added in step S2404, and the sum value is stored in the history display information. Is stored in the checksum area.

Further, in the subsequent step S2406, the CPU 241 performs processing of transferring the history display information of the internal work to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and ends the update processing of step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244.

Here, as understood from the above description, in this example, when backing up the history information stored in the RAM 243 to the memory 244, a sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243, and the sum value and The history information stored in the RAM 243 is stored in the memory 244.
As a method of calculating a sum value for judging abnormality of backup information and storing the sum value in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then stored in the memory 244 by the copy. It is also conceivable that a sum value is calculated from the history information and the sum value is stored in the memory 244. However, in this case, if copying of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 partially fails, the sum value itself becomes a correct value, that is, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the checksum processing (S2302 or S2304). Actually, incorrect history information is backed up, and there is a possibility that display failure of the history information may be caused.
According to the above-described method of copying the history information and the sum value, when the copying of the history information to the memory 244 partially fails, the history information is determined to be abnormal by the checksum processing. Since it is possible to prevent the history information stored in 244 from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent display of incorrect history information.

Subsequently, a process for displaying history information based on the history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the history display process (S2050). As understood from the above description of FIG. 41, this history display process is executed once per one frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, in step S2501, the CPU 241 determines whether the setting is being confirmed. Whether or not the setting is being confirmed can be determined based on whether or not the above-described setting confirmation command is received.
If the setting is not being confirmed, the CPU 241 ends the history display processing in step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed only during the setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the setting is being checked, the CPU 241 checks the history display flag in step S2502. The history display flag is an identifier (the initial value is OFF) set to ON in step S2504 described later, and ON indicates that the history is being displayed and OFF indicates that the history is not being displayed.
At the stage where the display start condition of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not satisfied, the history display flag is off, and the CPU 241 advances the process from step S2502 to step S2503.

  In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether a display instruction operation has been performed. As described above, in this example, the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines whether or not the effect button 13 is operated in step S2503.

  As understood from the description of steps S2501 to S2503, the CPU 241 accepts a display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs on condition that the setting is being confirmed.

If there is no display instruction operation in step S2503, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets (turns on) the history display flag in step S2504, and sets the display page identifier P to “0” in subsequent step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to executing the process of step S2505, the CPU 241 executes a history information screen creation process in step S2508. Then, the history display processing in step S2050 is completed.
The history information screen creation processing in step S2508 is processing for transmitting information necessary for screen display of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed after step S2505, information necessary for screen display of the first page (P = 0) is transmitted.
Details of the history information screen creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the history display flag is ON (that is, the state after the first page is already displayed), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2506 to determine whether a page switching operation has been performed. Is determined. That is, in this example, it is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on any of the direction instruction keys of the cross key 16.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 proceeds to the history information screen creation processing in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation processing in step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In FIG. 55, first, in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the head position Idx of the history display. That is, the position (the position on the RAM 243) of the storage area of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the head position Idx is calculated by “latest history position−P × α” (where α is the number of displayed individual history information per page: “10” in this example). For example, when the first page (P = 0) is displayed, the head position Idx is obtained as “the latest history position” from “the latest history position−0 × α”. Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P = 2), the head position Idx is obtained as “latest history position−2α”.

  In step S2602 following step S2601, the CPU 241 transmits a command of the page number. That is, the information of the page number specified from the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the display target page) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to “1” in step S2603, and executes the processing in steps S2604 to S2610 to perform information necessary for screen display of the display target page (specifically, individual history information and its display number). Is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the head position Idx. That is, the storage information of the area indicated by the head position Idx in the history storage area (history display information) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the start position Idx.
If individual history information is stored and it is determined that there is history information, the CPU 241 executes the command transmission process of the display number in step S2606, and then executes the command transmission process of the history information in step S2607. That is, the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the display number and the head position Idx is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

  In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the head position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the individual history information one past (Idx ← Idx-1). This updating process is executed so that the value of the head position Idx is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the head position Idx is “0”, the value is updated to “49”).

  Further, in subsequent step S2609, CPU 241 increments the display number by one, and determines in step S2610 whether or not the transmission process for one page (transmission of individual history information and display number) has been completed. This determination can be realized, for example, as a determination as to whether the value of the display number is equal to or more than α.

  If the transmission processing for one page has not been completed, the CPU 241 executes the processing of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, when the individual history information for one page is stored, the transmission process of the individual history information and its display number is repeated until the transmission process for one page ends. When the stored individual history information is less than one page, the transmission of the individual history information and the display number thereof are performed only for the stored individual history information (see S2605).

Even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx (that is, even if the storage value is “0”), the individual history information based on “0” is directly sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control unit. It can also be transmitted by a command. In this case, on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, for the individual history information that has received such a liquid crystal control command of “0”, a display indicating that there is no history is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (for example, “−” illustrated in FIG. 38). −−− ”is performed.
According to this method, the determination processing in step S2605 can be made unnecessary.

When transmitting the individual history information to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is the history information about the setting change (setting change history information). In the case of the setting change history information, it is also possible to confirm the abnormality of the setting value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re (whether or not outside the range of “0” to “5”).
If the set value Ve is out of the usable range Re and it is recognized that the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted has an abnormality, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is instructed to display the instruction information of the abnormal display. Send. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information can be displayed (for example, display of an “E” mark meaning an error). That is, it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, when an abnormality is found in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information of the set value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which the setting value Ve is abnormal can be prevented from being displayed, and it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not a normal setting change history.

The CPU 241 ends the history information screen creation process in step S2508 in response to determining in step S2610 that the transmission process for one page has been completed.
When the transmission processing for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command indicating that fact can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

  Here, in response to receiving the various liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the above processing, the liquid crystal control unit 40 responds to one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the mode illustrated in FIG. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that the screen is displayed.

The description returns to FIG.
When determining in step S2506 that the page switching operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not there is an end instruction operation, that is, whether or not there is an operation for instructing the end of the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is the operation of the effect button 13, and therefore, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the effect button 13 is operated in step S2509.

  When it is determined that the effect button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process of step S2050. As described above, the history display processing in step S2050 is performed once per one frame period, and the processing after step S2501 is executed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that the end instruction operation has been performed, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history display flag in step S2510, sets the demonstration screen display command in step S2511, and sets the history screen display command in step S2050. The display processing ends.
Note that the process of step S2511 is a process of setting a liquid crystal control command for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to execute the demonstration screen for waiting for a customer waiting in the command buffer.

Here, according to the above processing, when no individual history information exists for a certain page, only the page number is notified to the liquid crystal control unit 40 (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number are displayed. Is not sent.
When the page number is transmitted in this manner but the individual history information and the display number are not transmitted, the page number information of the page and the display number For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a screen indicating information indicating that there is no individual history information (for example, “−−−−” in FIG. 38).
As a result, it is possible to display all pages that have no history information, that is, include empty pages. That is, it is possible to transit to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information.

  It should be noted that a page having no individual history information may not be displayed. In this case, the CPU 241 does not cause the liquid crystal control unit 40 to execute the screen display of the current display page P in response to the determination that there is no history information in step S2605 (FIG. 55) at the stage of the display number = 1. An instruction may be given.

As understood from the processing in FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40, it is assumed that the individual history information is individually transmitted one by one. I have.
Thereby, the individual history information can be transmitted by the command.
Therefore, the program design on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side can be facilitated.

In the above example, the history information of the corresponding page is transmitted every time the page is switched. However, the history information of all pages is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 first, and the liquid crystal control unit 40 is switched when the page is switched. A page switching command may be transmitted to the side to instruct switching of the displayed page.

[5-3. Data Type of Setting Value in Embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit 24, an area for storing the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or the setting value command from the main control unit 20 (hereinafter referred to as a “notification setting value storage area A1”). ), And a storage area of a setting value Ve (hereinafter, referred to as a “history setting value storage area A2”) that constitutes a part of the individual history information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs. .
In the present embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, the program variable of the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 (hereinafter referred to as “notification setting value Pv1”) and the history setting value The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as “history set value Pv2”) of the set value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, the type of the notification setting value Pv1 and the history setting value Pv2 are set to the same “unsigned 8 bits”, so that the number of bits of the setting value Ve stored in the history setting value storage area A2 is set to the notification setting value. The number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the value storage area A1 is made to match.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the information from being lost when the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 is stored in the history setting value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, since the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, a situation may occur in which the setting value Ve obtained from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the information from being incorrectly displayed as the setting history information.

FIG. 56 shows an example of the numerical value of the setting value Ve that can be expressed by “8 bits without sign” as described above.
By using 8 bits, the set value Ve can represent six values of “1” to “6” as shown in the figure, and a value larger than “6”, in other words, an abnormal value outside the usable range Re can be expressed. It is possible to express.
That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store an abnormal value other than the value of the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Setting suggestion effect]

The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for causing a setting suggestion effect to suggest the current setting value Ve to the player.
The effect control unit 24 of the present example includes a suggestion effect using a left symbol, a suggestion effect using a mini-character notice, an suggestion effect at the end of a big hit, and an suggestion effect using an SU (step-up) notice, as described below. Is controlled to appear.

(Suggested production with left symbol)

First, the suggestion effect using the left symbol will be described. The left symbol referred to here means the “left” decorative symbol among the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a left symbol lottery process for selecting the contents of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the mode is the special mode 1 in step S2701. That is, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a predetermined mode as “special mode 1”.
If it is not the special mode 1, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is the special mode 2 in a step S2702. If it is not the special mode 2, in a step S2703, the continuous reach prefetching (the display of the decorative symbol for the variation after the prefetching is predetermined. It is determined whether or not a pre-reading effect controlled according to the mode has been won.

  In step S2703, if the continuous reach prefetch has not been won, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area (the notification set value storage area A1 described above) of the RAM 243 as the set value information acquisition processing in step S2705. In step S2706, a process of obtaining an offset value from the offset table based on the set value information is performed, and in step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. These tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probabilities for each symbol content (ten types of symbols from symbol 0 to symbol 9 in this example) to be selected are "1" to "6". Is set for each set value Ve. It should be noted that, in the figure, as the value representing the winning probability, the random number for the lottery is assumed to be 10000 kinds of values from 0 to 9999. As in the case, the threshold for the random number for lottery is actually stored. This is the same in the tables shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 65, FIG. 68, FIG. 72, and FIG.

  In the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 59, a corresponding offset value is stored for each set value Ve of “1” to “6”. Specifically, “0” is set for the set value Ve “1”, “1” is set for the set value Ve “2”, “2” is set for the set value Ve “3”, and the set value Ve “ “3” is stored for “4”, “4” is stored for the set value Ve “5”, and “5” is stored for the set value Ve “6”.

  In step S2706 of FIG. 57, the offset value corresponding to the current set value Ve obtained in step S2705 is obtained according to the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. In step S2707, among the lottery tables for each set value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 58, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected. Specifically, if the offset value is “0”, the lottery table with the set value “1” located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored at the address with the smallest number) is set to “1”. If the offset value is “2”, the setting value “3” located at the third position from the top in the left symbol lottery table if the offset value is “2”. The lottery table stored at the position specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table of “3”.

  According to the series of processes described above, if the current state does not correspond to any of the first special mode and the second special mode, and the continuous reach prefetching is in a non-winning state, the left symbol is determined by the winning probability based on the set value Ve. The contents are drawn by lot. In other words, the appearance rate of the symbols 0 to 9 of the left symbol differs depending on the set value Ve, whereby the setting suggestion indicating the type of the set value Ve to the player based on the appearance rate of the specific symbol content of the left symbol. Direction is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, if it is determined in step S2701 that the current mode is the first special mode, the CPU 241 passes the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 and ends a series of processes. That is, in the first special mode, the lottery of the symbol content of the left symbol is not performed.
If it is determined in step S2702 that the current mode is the second special mode, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach prefetch has been won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704, and does not refer to the set value Ve. The offset value is acquired from the offset table, and the process proceeds to the table selection process in step S2707. That is, in this case, an offset value of "0" in the left symbol lottery offset table is acquired (S2704), and a lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). . Accordingly, in the second special mode and in the continuous reach prefetching winning state, a lottery of the symbol content of the left symbol is performed with a fixed winning probability independent of the set value Ve. In other words, the setting suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed.

  As described above, in the present example, the setting suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed in the continuous reach prefetching winning state, but by this, the symbol content of the left symbol won in the left symbol lottery process is a continuous reach prefetch. It is possible to prevent the symbol content of the selected left symbol from becoming inconsistent.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this alternative example, a table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as a left symbol lottery offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same content as that shown in FIG. 59 is stored as a first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset different from the first left symbol lottery offset table. The table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value (“2” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60 is executed in the second special mode and the continuous reach prefetching win, and the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 are executed instead of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. 57. Is different.
In this case, the CPU 241 obtains the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by obtaining the set value information in step S2710, and obtains an offset value from the second offset table based on the set value information in subsequent step S2711. Then, the process proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 has the same value regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected in step S2707 in this case regardless of the set value Ve.
In this alternative example, in step S2706, the first left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table.

As described above, in the second special mode, as a technique for performing the left symbol lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve corresponding to the continuous reach prefetch winning, a fixed offset value is acquired without referring to the set value Ve. The method is not limited to the method, and a method is adopted in which the same lottery table is selected irrespective of the set value Ve by referring to an offset table storing the same offset value for each set value Ve as shown in FIG. 61B. Can also.

(Suggested production by mini-character notice)

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the mini-charter notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as a premise, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, two kinds of mini-chara announcement effects, a first mini-chara announcement effect and a second mini-chara announcement effect, can appear. In addition, it is assumed that the lottery process of the first mini-character announcement effect and the second mini-character announcement effect is performed as a separate process from the process illustrated in FIG.
In this example, the effect that suggests the set value Ve is allowed to appear as the second mini-character announcement effect, instead of the effect that suggests the set value Ve for the first mini-character announcement effect.

  In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 determines in step S2801 whether or not the mini-chart announcement effect has been won. If the mini-character announcement effect has not been won, the CPU 241 does not execute a series of processes described below, and ends the mini-character announcement lottery process of FIG.

If the mini-character announcement effect has been won, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether or not the winning content is the first mini-character announcement.
If it is determined that the first mini character announcement production has been won and the winning content is the first mini character announcement, the CPU 241 includes the fluctuation pattern information acquisition processing in step S2803 in the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20. After performing the process of acquiring the variation pattern information to be obtained, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the variation pattern won in step S2804, and the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed in step S2805. .

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini-character announcement lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first announcement offset table used in step S2804. These tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
In the first announcement offset table shown in FIG. 64, the short variation pattern (“short variation P” in the figure), the reach variation pattern (“reach variation P” in the figure), and the super reach variation pattern (“SP reach P” in the figure) )), An offset value is determined. In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-described “normal fluctuation 4 s”, “normal fluctuation 6 s”, “normal fluctuation 8 s”, and “normal fluctuation 12 s”. The patterns correspond to the above-mentioned "super reach 1,""super reach 2,""super reach 3," and "super reach 4." As shown in the figure, 0 is set for the short variation pattern, 1 is set for the reach variation pattern, and the super reach variation pattern is set. Has an offset value of 2.

  In the first mini-character announcement lottery table of FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables in which the distribution of the winning probability is determined for each content of the first mini-character announcement are prepared. In this example, five kinds of contents of the first mini-chara notice “None”, “Hold change explanation”, “Strong notice explanation”, “Probable change mode explanation” and “Character introduction” are prepared. Three types of tables, Table 1 to Table 3, which determine the distribution of the winning probability to the contents, are prepared.

  In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2804, an offset value is acquired from the first announcement offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning variation pattern specified from the acquired variation pattern information. In the selection process, a lottery table is selected from the first mini-character announcement lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, when the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is acquired as the offset value, Table 1 is selected. In addition, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as an offset value, Table 2 is selected. If the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as an offset value, Table 3 is selected. Selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the contents of the first mini-character notice based on the selected value, and ends the mini-character notice lottery process shown in FIG. That is, the contents of the first mini-chara notice are determined according to the distribution values in the table selected from tables 1 to 3.
As described above, the first mini-character announcement effect is not an effect according to the set value Ve, but an effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

  If the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini-character notice, the CPU 241 acquires setting change information in step S2807, and determines in step S2808 whether the setting has been changed. That is, the latest individual history information among the individual history information stored for displaying the above-described setting history confirmation screen Gs is acquired, and whether or not the information of “type” in the individual history information is “setting change” is determined. Is determined.

  If the information of the “type” is not “setting change” in step S2808 and a negative result indicating that the setting has not been changed is obtained in step S2808, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2809 to execute the setting value information acquisition processing. In step S2810, an offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the set value information, and in step S2811, a process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed. In step S2820, a second mini-charter notice is generated based on the lottery value. Determine the content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini-character announcement lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second announcement offset table used in step S2810. Are stored in a predetermined area of each of them).
In the second preview offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is determined for each set value Ve. In the second preview offset table of this example, the offset value is set not only for the set values Ve “1” to “6” but also for the values “up” and “down”. This will be described later.

  In the second mini-character announcement lottery table of FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables in which the distribution of the winning probability is determined for each content of the second mini-character announcement are prepared. In this example, the contents of the second mini-character notice are “none”, “game description”, “setting suggestion explanation 1”, “setting suggestion explanation 2”, “setting suggestion explanation 3”, “setting suggestion explanation 4”, “setting suggestion explanation 5”. Are prepared. As the lottery table, a table that determines the distribution of the winning probabilities for these contents is set for each of the set values Ve “1” to “6” and “up” and “down”. A total of eight types are provided correspondingly.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, an offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, and in the selection process of step S2811, the offset value , A lottery table is selected from the second mini-character announcement lottery table shown in FIG.
Then, in the determination process of step S2820 following step S2811, a process of determining the content of the second mini-character notice according to the selected lottery table is performed.

If the CPU 241 obtains an affirmative result in the previous step S2808 that the above-mentioned “type” information is “setting change” and the setting has been changed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2812 to set the previous and current setting value information. Is determined, and in a succeeding step S2813, it is determined whether or not the set value is higher than the previous value.
That is, of the individual history information whose “type” information is “setting change”, information of the setting value Ve included in the individual history information stored at the time of the previous setting change, and the “notification setting value storage area A1” of the RAM 243. And the information of the set value Ve stored in is stored, and it is determined whether or not the latter set value Ve is larger than the former set value Ve.

In step S2813, if a negative result is obtained that the latest set value Ve is not larger than the previous set value Ve and the set value is not higher than the previous set value Ve, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2814 and proceeds to step S2814. The selected value is obtained, and in step S2815, the offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the first selected value. That is, the offset value is obtained from the second notice offset table of FIG. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to “for lowering” shown in FIG. 66. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps S2814 and S2815, the second selection value is obtained. An offset value corresponding to “for lowering” is obtained from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, CPU 241 executes a process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, a process of selecting a table corresponding to “for lowering” from the second mini-character preview lottery table of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the determination processing in step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character announcement effect when the setting change for lowering the set value Ve is performed is determined based on the “lowering” lottery table.

On the other hand, if the CPU 241 obtains a positive result indicating that the set value is higher than the previous value in step S2813, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to acquire a second selection value, and based on the second selection value in subsequent step S2818. Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to “for raising” shown in FIG. 66. Therefore, by executing the processes of steps S2817 and S2818, “2nd selection value” The offset value corresponding to "for raising" is obtained.
Then, in a step S2819 following the step S2818, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, executes a process of selecting a table corresponding to “for raising” from the second mini-character preview lottery table in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the determination processing in step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character announcement effect when the setting change for increasing the setting value Ve is performed is determined based on the “raising” lottery table.

  According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities of the preview contents “none”, “game characteristics explanation”, “setting suggestion explanation 1”, “setting suggestion explanation 2”, and “setting suggestion explanation 3” are “raising” and “ The same applies to “lowering”, but the winning probabilities for “up suggestion explanation 4” and “setting suggestion explanation 5” are different between “up” and “lowering”. Regarding “setting suggestion explanation 4”, the setting values Ve “1” to “6” and the winning probability of “down” are all “0”, while the winning probability of “up” is other than “0”. Specifically, in this example, it is set to “1000/10000”, so that “setting suggestion explanation 4” is a notice content that can appear only in the case of “for raising”. As for “setting suggestion explanation 5”, the winning probabilities of the set values Ve “1” to “6” and “up” are all “0”, while the winning probability of “down” is “0”. (In this example, “1000/10000”), and thus “setting suggestion explanation 5” is a notice content that can appear only in the case of “lowering”.

  In FIG. 62, CPU 241 ends the mini-charter notice lottery process in response to executing the determination process in step S2820.

Here, in determining whether the set value is higher than the previous time in step S2813, the set value Ve stored in the “history set value storage area A2” in the RAM 243 and the “notification set value storage area” are determined. The set value Ve stored in “A1” is compared. At this time, in the RAM 243, an area for storing the previous set value Ve separately from the “history set value storage area A2” ( A “previous set value storage area A3”) may be provided.
In this case, the previous setting value Ve is stored in the memory 244 separately from the setting history information. For example, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the value of the “notification setting value storage area A1” is stored in the memory 244. When writing and turning on the power, the value written to the memory 244 may be read out to the “previous setting value storage area A3”.
With respect to the effect lottery, the up / down determination is made by comparing the values of the “previous setting value storage area A3” and the “notification setting value storage area A1”.

In step S2813, if the previous and current set values Ve are the same value, the current set value Ve stored in the “notification set value storage area A1” is used as an offset to refer to the second mini-chara announcement lottery table. It is possible to do.

(Suggested production by jackpot end production)

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process of performing lottery on the basis of the set value Ve for the content of the big hit end INT (interval) effect that appears when the round game has been executed the specified number of rounds. Specifically, the lottery of the background image in the big hit end INT effect is performed.
Here, for the sake of explanation, it is assumed that the types of hits are three types: “3R probability change”, “9R probability change”, and “3R time saving”.

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the hit type is “3R probable change”. The type of the hit is notified by, for example, a decorative design specification command transmitted from the main control unit 20.
If the hit type is not “3R probable”, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 to determine whether or not the hit type is “9R probable”. End the jackpot effect lottery process. That is, when the hit type is “3R working hours”, the setting suggestion by the big hit end INT effect is not performed.

  In each of the case where the hit type is “3R probable change” in step S2901 and the case where the hit type is “9R probable change” in step S2902, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2903 and is performing the probable change. Determine whether or not. This corresponds to determining whether or not the current hit is a hit as a series of villas (whether or not this is the first hit).

  If it is determined that the probability is not being changed, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904 to execute the setting value information acquisition processing, and then acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the setting value information in step S2905. Then, in the next step S2906, a process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Further, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2910, and determines a suggestion element during the big hit end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table (hereinafter referred to as “big hit end INT suggestion element table”) for lottery of the big hit end suggestion element used in step S2906, and FIG. 69 shows the first lottery table used in step S2905. Examples of offset tables are shown (note that these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is determined for each set value Ve. Specifically, offset values of “0” to “5” are determined for the set values Ve “1” to “6” as shown in the figure.

In the big hit end INT suggestion element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables in which the distribution of the winning probability is determined for each content of the big hit end INT effect are prepared. In this example, the setting suggestion uses the background image in the big hit end INT effect, and as shown in the figure, there are a total of 13 types of contents of “none (no predetermined background image)” and “background 1” to “background 12”. Are prepared, and as the lottery table, a plurality of tables that determine the distribution of the winning probabilities for these contents are prepared.
In the big hit end suggestion element table of the present example, six lots that determine the sorting for each of the set values Ve “1” to “6” are stored in order from the upper layer as these lottery tables, and the lower layer is Further, six values that determine the distribution to each of the set values Ve “1” to “6” are stored. The six lottery tables on the upper layer are tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve at the time of the first hit, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer are tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve during the extended holiday. It is said.

In FIG. 67, in the acquisition processing in step S2905, an offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, and in the selection processing in step S2906, the offset value based on the offset value is acquired. Then, the lottery table is selected from the big hit end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. At this time, in the first offset table, since the offset value with respect to the set value Ve is in the range of “0” to “5”, in the selection processing in step S2906, the lottery is selected from the upper six in the big hit end INT suggestion element table. The table is selected. That is, from this, a lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from among the lottery tables corresponding to the first hit.
In the determination process of step S2910 performed after step S2906, a process of determining a background (in some cases, none) as a suggestion element during the jackpot end INT according to the selected lottery table is performed.

  If it is determined in the previous step S2903 that the change is being made, that is, it is during the extended vacation, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2907 to execute the set value information acquisition processing, and then, based on the set value information in step S2908. Then, an offset value is acquired from the second offset table, a process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed in a succeeding step S2909, and a determination process of a step S2910 is executed.

FIG. 70 illustrates an example of the second offset table used in step S2908 (also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242 as the second offset table).
As shown in the drawing, in the second offset table, offset values of “6” to “11” are defined for the set values Ve “1” to “6”.
For this reason, in the acquisition processing of step S2908, the lottery table is selected from the lower six in the big hit end INT suggestion element table, that is, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve from the lottery table corresponding to the extended holiday. Is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed after step S2909, a process of determining the background (in some cases, none) as a suggestion element during the big hit INT according to the lottery table selected in step S2909 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in this example, the lottery table corresponding to the initial hit stored in the upper layer side has a sorting value of 0 for the background 7 to the background 12, and the lottery table corresponding to the lower villa. , The distribution value for background 1 to background 6 is set to 0. Thereby, the backgrounds 1 to 6 are not made to appear at the time of consecutive holidays (they are not made to appear as setting suggestive elements), and the backgrounds 7 to 12 are not made to appear at the time of the first hit.

  The CPU 241 ends the jackpot effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to executing the determination process in step S2910.

Here, offset tables (FIGS. 69 and 70) in which different offset values are defined for the common set value Ve as described above are provided, and these offset tables are selectively used according to the conditions to end the big hit as shown in FIG. By performing the lottery using the INT suggestion element table, when performing a different lottery for each condition as the lottery of the setting suggestion element, the table reference process can be a common process, and the program capacity can be reduced. it can.

(Suggested production by SU notice)

Subsequently, the suggested effect by the SU notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77.
The SU announcement effect is a type of an announcement effect that informs the possibility of controlling to an advantageous state that is an advantageous state for the player, and is an effect having one to a plurality of announcement steps. In other words, it is a stage announcement effect having a stage.
In this example, the effect of suggesting the set value Ve can be displayed using the content of the SU notice effect, specifically, the background image.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU preview lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as the variation pattern information acquisition process of step S3001, the CPU 241 performs a process of acquiring information on a variation pattern that has been won based on, for example, the above-described decorative symbol designation command. Next, in step S3002, the CPU 241 obtains an offset value from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern, selects a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and performs an SU stage based on the lottery value in step S3004. And processing to determine the contents.

FIG. 72 shows an example of an SU effect table used in the selection process in step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of an SU stage lottery offset table used in the acquisition process in step S3002 (these tables are also stored in the ROM 242 as predetermined tables). Are stored in each area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, the short variation pattern (“short variation P”) and the reach variation pattern (“reach variation P”) are similar to the first announcement offset table shown in FIG. ), And an offset value is determined for each super reach variation pattern (“SP reach P”). In this example, an offset of 0 is set for the short variation pattern, 1 is set for the reach variation pattern, and 2 is set for the super reach variation pattern. Each value is defined.

In the SU effect table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables in which the allocation of the winning probability is determined for each lottery target related to the SU announcement effect are prepared. In this example, the lottery target as the SU announcement effect “none” and the lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) Three kinds of lottery tables are prepared in which sorting values are determined for each of the objects ("Table 1,""Table2," and "Table 3" in the figure). Here, parentheses such as (white frame) attached after SU1 to SU5 indicating the SU stage mean the content of the SU preview effect, specifically, the type of the background image. A background image with a white frame, and (character A) and (character B) each mean a background image including an image of a specific character.
In the SU effect table, “table 1”, “table 2”, and “table 3” are stored in order from the upper layer.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition processing in step S3002, an offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning fluctuation pattern, and in the selection processing in step S3003, the table shown in FIG. A lottery table is selected. Specifically, in this example, when the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is acquired as the offset value, Table 1 is selected. Also, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as an offset value, Table 2 is selected. If the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as an offset value, Table 3 is selected. Selected.
Then, in step S3004 subsequent to step S3003, the CPU 241 sets the SU announcement effect “none” based on the stored value (lottery value) of the table thus selected from Table 1 to Table 3 and the random number value for lottery. , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B). That is, the stage and content of the SU are determined.

According to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 72 (also in this example, the random number for lottery can take 10000 to 1999), in the table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU announcement effect “None” , The winning probability of SU1 (white frame) is the highest, and the remaining SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) For), the winning probability is set to 0.
In Table 2 corresponding to the reach variation pattern, in the order of SU5 (character B), SU4 (character A), SU announcement effect "none", SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), and SU3 (white frame) The winning probability is gradually increased.
In Table 3 corresponding to the super-reach variation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (character B) is the highest, and thereafter SU4 (character A), SU3 (white frame), and the SU announcement effect "None" gradually. The winning probability is reduced, and the winning probability of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) is minimized.

The CPU 241 determines whether or not SU3 or more has been won in step S3005 in response to executing the processing in step S3004. That is, it is determined whether any of SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) has been determined in step S3004.
If the winning has not been achieved for SU3 or more, the CPU 241 ends the SU preview lottery process shown in FIG. In other words, in the case of winning below SU2, the process for replacing the content of the SU announcement effect described below is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the winner is SU3 or more, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3006 to determine whether or not the previous SU3 danger occurred. In other words, the SU announcement effect that appeared last time is an SU announcement effect of SU3 or more whose background has been replaced with the background of the danger pattern frame by replacing the contents using the SU3 replacement table described later, and the SU announcement effect is the object of the announcement. It is determined whether or not a determination result of a deviation has been obtained in the symbol variation display game described above.

  If it is determined in step S3006 that the last time the vehicle was out of the SU3 danger, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3007, acquires the offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and sets the lottery table based on the offset value in step S3008. Then, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value in step S3012.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process in step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process in step S3007 (these tables are also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242). Respectively stored).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is determined for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the drawing, offset values “0” to “6” are set for set values Ve “1” to “6”. "5" is defined.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table is prepared for each set value Ve in which the distribution value for each of the default, red, and danger replacement contents is determined. Here, "default" means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and "red" and "danger" mean that the frame is replaced with a red color and a danger pattern, respectively.
As illustrated, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table with the set value Ve “1” is stored in the uppermost layer, and thereafter, the lottery table with the larger value of the set value Ve is stored so as to be positioned lower. I have.

71, in the acquisition processing in step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the set value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value “0” corresponding to the set value Ve “1” in the offset table. Then, in the selection processing of step S3008, a lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value “0” thus obtained. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve “1” stored in the uppermost layer in the SU3 replacement table is selected.
In the determination processing of step S3012 executed after step S3008, the replacement content is determined from “default”, “red”, and “danger” based on the lottery table selected in this manner.

  Here, according to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, by performing the processing of steps S3007 → S3008 → S3012, the lottery table having the highest “default” winning probability is selected. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, in the case where the vehicle has missed the previous SU3 danger, it is difficult for the SU3 danger to perform the SU announcement effect again.

  On the other hand, in the previous step S3006, when it is determined that the current value has deviated from the previous SU3 danger, the CPU 241 executes the setting value information acquisition processing in step S3009, and acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the setting value information in step S3010. Then, in the following step S3011, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, a process of determining the replacement content of SU3 based on the lottery value is performed.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, and in the subsequent step S3011, the SU3 shown in FIG. A lottery table based on the acquired offset value is selected from the replacement table. Specifically, if the offset value is “0”, the lottery table of the set value Ve “1” stored at the uppermost position is selected, and if the offset value is “1”, the lottery table is stored at the position next to the uppermost position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table with the set value “2”.
In this case, in the determination processing in step S3012, the replacement content is determined from “default”, “red”, and “danger” based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

  According to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the “default” winning probability, while the higher the “red” setting, the higher the winning probability. Have been. Regarding “Danger”, the winning probability is set lower than “Danger” and “Red” irrespective of the set value Ve, and the winning probability is maximized when the set value Ve is “6”, which is the highest setting. Has been. In this example, the winning probability of “Danger” is the same for the set values Ve “1” to “5”, and the winning probability is increased only for the set value Ve “6”.

  The CPU 241 ends the SU preview lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to executing the determination process in step S3012.

  As understood from the above-described series of processes, in the present embodiment, the “stage” of the SU announcement effect (step announcement effect) can be determined based on the fluctuation information, and the “content” of the SU announcement effect is set to the set value Ve. It can be decided on the basis. Specifically, in this example, the "contents" of the SU notice effect can be determined by replacement.

As for the setting suggestion using the stage announcement effect, if the stage of the stage announcement effect is determined based on the set value, the stage announcement effect becomes difficult to develop, and it is difficult to enhance the effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the stage announcement effect can be determined according to the fluctuation information, and the announcement content of the stage announcement effect can be determined based on the set value.
Thereby, in realizing the setting suggestion effect using the stage announcement effect, it is possible to prevent the stage announcement effect from becoming difficult to develop, and to enhance the effect.

  Usually, a plurality of types of notice effects are implemented in a gaming machine, but among them, all of the notices having stages as the contents of the notice effects may be configured as described above, or only a part of the notice is described above. Such a configuration may be adopted. Further, in order to enhance the effect of the presentation, for some of the notices, the “stage” may be determined based on the set value Ve, and the “content” may be determined based on the fluctuation information. By doing so, it is possible to give different characteristics between the notices, and it is possible to improve the production appeal.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of the SU preview lottery process.
First, in this alternative example, a table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as an SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same contents as those shown in FIG. 75 is stored as the first offset table for SU3 replacement (FIG. 77A), and a second offset table for SU3 replacement different from the first offset table for SU3 replacement is stored. (FIG. 77B).
In the SU3 replacement second offset table, the same offset value (“0” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The SU preview lottery process shown in FIG. 76 is different from the previous process in that the processes of steps S3020 and S3021 are executed instead of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 in the acquisition of the set value information in step S3020, and in the following step S3021, sets the offset value from the SU3 replacement second offset table based on the set value information. And proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S3008.
Since the offset value obtained in step S3021 is the same regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve in the selection processing in step S3008 in this case. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value “0” corresponding to the set value Ve “1” is selected, the lottery table in which the content replacement is least likely to occur is selected as in the processing example of FIG. 71. become.
In this case, in the acquisition processing in step S3010, the first offset table for SU3 replacement shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

  As described above, the method for selecting the same lottery table irrespective of the set value Ve is not limited to the method of acquiring a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve, as shown in FIG. 77B. A method of selecting a lottery table based on an offset value obtained from an offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve may be adopted.

Here, the lottery of the SU announcement effect may be performed in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a lottery mode of an SU announcement effect in the embodiment.
First, in the drawing, the expansion M06J-1, the expansion M06J-2, and the expansion M06J-3 shown at the lower left of the upper table mean the following expansion, respectively.

M06J-1: Staying in a specific background mode, and winning the target SU notice (fireworks launch SU notice) without winning the prefetch notice

M06J-2: Staying in a specific background mode, executing pre-reading notice, and winning the target SU notice

M06J-3: While staying in the specific background mode, the fluctuation has won the target fluctuation of the pre-reading notice and the target SU notice.

  In the development M06J-1, lottery of the target SU notice is performed based on the table TBL1. In the deployments M06J-2 and M06J-3, the lottery of the target SU notice is performed based on the tables TBL2 and TBL3, respectively.

In the development M06J-1, a case where the result of the lottery based on the table TBL1 results in the winning of SU3, SU4, and a case in which the result of the drawing is SU5 is referred to as the development M06L-1.
Further, in the development M06J-2, a case where the lottery based on the table TBL2 has been selected to win SU3 and SU4, and a case where the lottery has been won SU5 are defined as a development M06L-2.
Further, in the development M06J-3, the case where the result of the lottery based on the table TBL3 has been won for the SU3 and SU4 and the case where the result has been won for the SU5 are referred to as the development M06L-3.
When SU5 is won in these developments M06L-1 to M06L-3, a lottery is performed on the contents of SU5 based on tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6, respectively.

The table in the lower part of FIG. 78 illustrates the lottery method for SU3 content replacement (background replacement) for each development of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
As shown in the drawing, in the deployment M06L-1, it is determined whether or not it has been removed by the previous danger (see step S3006). If there is no change in the previous danger, there is no branch for each set value Ve, and the replacement content is randomly selected based on the table TBL4.
On the other hand, if the last danger has not occurred, the lottery method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, the replacement content is randomly selected using a different table (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

  In addition, in the developments M06L-2 and M06L-3, there is no branch based on whether or not the previous danger has occurred and the branch based on the set value Ve, and the replacement content is randomly selected based on the tables TBL11 and TBL12 as illustrated.

In the above-mentioned lottery method, in a state in which the pre-reading notice has not been won as the development M06J-1, it is possible to make a setting suggestion by the SU notice.
In this way, in the case of a change with a low expectation that is not enough to look ahead, or a change in which the look-ahead notice is not executed toward the target change of the look-ahead, the role of the SU notice is used for the purpose of indicating the reliability of the change. Instead, it can be used to suggest settings.

In addition, in the state where the pre-reading notice is being executed as the development M06J-2, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
In the case where the pre-reading notice is executed using a plurality of fluctuations, and if the SU notice is won in the fluctuation just in the course of the pre-reading, the pre-reading indicating the winning expectation degree is performed toward the target fluctuation of the pre-reading. Since it is in the middle, it is not used for the purpose of suggesting the setting as the role of the SU notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice indicates the expected degree of winning toward the target change, and the interest of the player is focused on there, so in such a situation, do not include the setting suggestion element, We are trying to prevent confusion.

Further, even in a state where the change is the target change of the pre-reading notice as the development M06J-3, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
In this case, since the fluctuation is a target fluctuation of the look-ahead and a fluctuation with high expectation, use the role of the SU notice for the purpose of indicating the reliability of the fluctuation and not for the purpose of indicating the setting. By doing so, the player is prevented from being confused.

As described above, the expansion M06L-1, the expansion M06L-2, and the expansion M06L-3 are employed as the lottery method, but any one of them may be employed, or any combination thereof may be employed. Good.
Regarding the development M06L-2, when there are a plurality of types of pre-reading advance notices, it is configured such that the setting suggestion based on the SU preliminary notice is not performed only during execution of a specific pre-reading advance notice (eg, full screen pre-read notice). During the execution of the pre-reading notice (for example, the suspension change notice), the setting may be suggested by the SU notice.
Regarding the development M06L-3, when there are a plurality of types of pre-reading notices, the setting suggestion by the SU pre-notification is not performed in a state where the change is a target change of a specific pre-reading notice (eg, a full screen pre-reading notice or the like). In a state where the fluctuation is a target fluctuation of other pre-reading advance notice (eg, suspension change advance notice, etc.), the setting suggestion by the SU notice may be performed.
In addition, if the change is a hit change, the setting suggestion is not performed by the setting suggestion notice including the setting suggestion element such as the SU notice described above. It may be configured to do so.

[5-5. Regarding the difference in the set value range corresponding to the main control unit and the production control unit]

Here, as can be understood from the various lottery processes of the effect control unit 24 described above, the effect control unit 24 determines that the set value Ve is the actual use range Ru (“1”, “2”, “6” in this example). ), If the value is within the usable range Re ("1" to "6"), the effect lottery is performed normally without error.

  On the other hand, if the set value Ve is not a value within the actual use range Ru, the main control unit 20 cannot execute at least a specific process related to the game progress. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, if the set value Ve (set value Vd) is not a value within the use range Ru, the process is illustrated in FIG. It becomes impossible to acquire the proper judgment reference value TH and the set difference information from the big hit judgment random number judgment table, so that the big hit judgment cannot be properly executed.

The difference between the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 corresponding to the set values as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one of N (N is a natural number of 2 or more) types of setting values by the setting change process (step S115), and based on the N types of setting values. , A first process relating to the progress of the game operation can be executed.
On the other hand, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second processing relating to the progress of the effect operation based on the M set value information, which is greater than N types, for the set value information regarding the set values received from the main control unit 20. It has been.

Thereby, when the number of steps of the set value can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second processing relating to the progress of the effect operation up to the M-step. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 52A above, the effect control unit 24 includes a command (set value information) for notifying the set value transmitted by the main control unit 20, specifically, setting confirmation. Regarding the set value information as the middle command and the command at the time of setting change, it is possible to analyze not only three kinds of set value information corresponding to the actual use range Ru but six set value information corresponding to the usable range Re. ing.
More specifically, for the setting confirmation command and the setting change command, it is possible to receive commands including any one of the identification data “1” to “6” in steps S2150 and S2152, respectively. Can be analyzed.

  That is, assuming that the three types of set values Ve corresponding to the use range Ru are N types of set values that can be set in the setting change process, the effect control unit 24 sets the M types of set values larger than the N types. It is configured to be able to analyze information.

Thus, when the number of stages of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the set value information up to M stages. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24 determines that the setting value Vd set in the setting change processing on the main control unit 20 side corresponds to the setting value analysis information based on the analyzed setting value information ( For example, even when the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd matches the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information) or when they do not correspond, the predetermined process (the various effect lottery processes described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 77) is performed. It is configured to be executable.

Thus, when the number of stages of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can execute the process up to the M stage, and does not need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage. It is possible to do.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value Ve while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

Here, according to the processing of FIG. 52A, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the setting change end command is received in step S2154, the setting value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is set to a value within an appropriate range. It is assumed that the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158 without confirming whether or not there is any (step S2162).
Thus, it is possible to prevent the effect control unit 24 from notifying the setting value abnormality when the main control unit 20 is about to end the setting change process normally. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main control unit 20 advances the subsequent game operation in accordance with the normal end of the setting change process while the effect control unit 24 performs the abnormality notification, and To prevent anxiety in the elderly.

According to the processing of FIG. 52A, effect control unit 24 determines in step S2162 whether or not set value Ve received from main control unit 20 is within usable range Re. The received set value Ve (identification data described above) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the “notification set value storage area A1” described above), and if the received set value Ve is out of the usable range Re, the received set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. I do not do it.
When the set value Ve is out of the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243, but in the present embodiment, the “set value command” is transmitted at a plurality of timings other than when the setting is changed. Is also transmitted at least at the time of power failure recovery (S808 at the time of power failure recovery) and at the start of fluctuation (S1411), so that the set value Ve within the usable range Re is received at those timings. An appropriate set value Ve can be stored in the RAM 243.

  Note that the set value command can be transmitted in addition to the timing exemplified above, during a customer waiting demonstration, at the start or end of a big hit or a small hit, at the start of a round game, at the start of an INT between rounds, and the like.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Re, it is stored in the RAM 243 as it is, even if it is not a value within the usable range Ru, as described above. In the present embodiment, as in the lottery processing related to various effects (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.), since the lottery processing corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re, the set value Ve is set to a value within the use range Ru. Even if it is not, no bug occurs in the production lottery process.

According to the processing of FIG. 52A, when the setting value Ve is out of the usable range Re, in the setting history information updating processing in step S2166, the setting value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, This is stored in the “history setting value storage area A2” described above (see step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history set value storage area A2 as described above, the abnormality of the set value Ve is checked during the transmission processing in step S2607 (FIG. 55) described above. Thus, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As described above, in the process of confirming the abnormality at this time, it is determined whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is the history information on the setting change (setting change history information). In some cases, it is determined whether the set value Ve included in the history information is outside the usable range Re. If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the liquid crystal control is performed. The instruction information of the abnormal display is transmitted to the unit 40. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information can be displayed (for example, display of an “E” mark meaning an error).

<6. Modification>

Here, in the above description, the set value Ve set in the setting change process (S115) shown in FIG. 10 (the set value Ve saved in step S416) is set in the main loop pre-process (S119) shown in FIG. Although the example in which the value command (S808) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side is given, the set value Ve set by the setting change process can also be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command at the time of the end of the setting change. Specifically, in the embodiment, the setting change end command is transmitted (S605, S606) in the RAM clear processing (S116) shown in FIG. 14 as the command at the end of the setting change. Instead of this, a configuration in which the “setting change completion command” including the setting value Ve set in the setting changing process is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 may be adopted.

Further, in the processing of FIG. 52A described above, the processing in which the effect control unit 24 stores the set value Ve in the RAM 243 (S2163) can be executed every time a set value command is received from the main control unit 20. However, the process of storing the set value Ve in the RAM 243 may be performed only when the setting is changed.
When the process of storing the set value Ve in the RAM 243 is performed only when the setting is changed in this manner, when the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re as in the process shown in FIG. Is not stored (route from S2162 to S2164), the set value Ve is not set in the RAM 243.
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is out of the usable range Re, a value representing the set value Ve “1” (in other words, a value representing the lowest step of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. It is also possible to prevent the setting of the set value Ve itself from being stopped while preventing the abnormal set value Ve from being set in the RAM 243.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command processing S2130e as a first modification including the storage of the lowest step value as described above.
The setting-related command processing S2130e as the first modification corresponds to the case where the main control unit 20 transmits the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing to the effect control unit 24 side by the above-described “setting change completion command”. It is assumed that the processing has been performed.
Differences from the processing shown in FIG. 52A are that the reception change processing of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the processing in steps S2159 to S2161, and the processing in step S2164 are omitted, and step S2181 Is added.

In the processing shown in FIG. 79, first, in step S2180, the CPU 241 performs reception determination processing of a “setting change completion command”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command including any of the notification information (identification data) of the setting values Ve “1” to “6” has been received as the “setting change completion command”.
If it is determined in step S2180 that the “setting change completion command” (setting values “1” to “6”) has not been received, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2150. In this case, in response to a negative result obtained in step S2151, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2153. If a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes illustrated in FIG.
Further, in this case, the CPU 241 ends the series of processing illustrated in FIG. 79 in response to executing the scenario registration processing in steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2180 that the “setting change completion command” (setting values “1” to “6”) has been received, the CPU 241 executes a setting change end scenario registration process in step S2158.
If the setting value Ve included in the received “setting change completion command” is within the usable range Re of “1” to “6” by the determination processing in step S2180 described above, the setting change end scenario is determined in step S2158. be registered. That is, even when the unused setting value Ve within the usable range Re is received, an effect of notifying the end of the setting change is performed.

In response to executing the scenario registration processing of step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether the setting information is in the usable range Re.
If the setting information is in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 performs processing for storing the setting value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to the history information updating processing in step S2166.
On the other hand, if the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value “1” in the RAM 243 in step S2181, and proceeds to the history information updating process in step S2166.

  According to the processing as the first modification as described above, if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, corresponding to the case where the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed, the specific value ( In this example, “1”) can be stored.

When the specific value (“1”) is stored in the setting value storage area (the “notification setting value storage area A1”) of the RAM 243 as in the first modification described above, the setting value in the setting history information is used. A specific value ("1") may also be stored for Ve (that is, the "history setting value storage area A2" described above).
Alternatively, an abnormal value may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing the abnormal value in the setting history information, it is possible to store the fact that the setting value Ve is abnormal as the history information while performing the lottery of the game based on the specific value.

Here, when the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243, whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re can be determined, not whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re.
For example, when the set value Ve to be used is “1”, “2”, or “6” as in this example, first, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Re. If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether or not the set value Ve is an unused value (any of “3”, “4”, and “5”).
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. On the other hand, when the set value Ve is an unused value, a specific value (“1”) may be stored in the RAM 243. Alternatively, when the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve can be corrected to a value in the use range Ru and stored in the RAM 243. For example, when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", the correction is made to "2", and when the set value Ve is "5", the correction is made to "6".

FIG. 80 is a flowchart of a setting-related command process S2130e as a second modification including the above-described correction of the setting value Ve.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 79 is that the processes of steps S2182 and S2183 are added.
In this case, in step S2162, the CPU 241 determines that the setting information is within the usable range Re, and proceeds to step S2182 to determine whether the setting information is an unused value. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether the set value Ve is any of “3”, “4”, and “5” (any of “02H”, “03H”, and “04H”).
If it is determined that the setting information is not an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243. On the other hand, when determining that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183, and stores the correction value in the RAM 243 with reference to the setting value correction table. More specifically, in this example, when the set value Ve is “3” or “4”, the set value is corrected to “2” with reference to a set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242), and the set value Ve is set to “5”. At this time, the value is corrected to “6”, and the corrected set value Ve is stored in the “notification set value storage area A1” of the RAM 243.

Here, in the description so far, the main control unit 20 uses the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 to set the setting value Vd handled by the main control unit 20 according to the program of the effect control unit 24. Although the example in which the value is converted to the value Ve has been described, the main control unit 20 transmits the information of the set value Vd to the effect control unit 24 without performing the conversion using the set value offset conversion table, and the setting in the effect control unit 24 is performed. A configuration for converting the value Vd may be adopted.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a setting value conversion table to be used by the effect control unit 24 in this case. Here, it is assumed that the stage of the set value Ve and the value to be used are uniquely determined by the specification information of the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in the figure, the setting value conversion table includes information of the setting value Vd transmitted by the main control unit 20 side, specifically, a conversion table storing conversion values for each of “0” to “5”. Among them, four types of “spec 1” to “spec 4” are prepared.

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) selects a corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on, for example, the specification information specified by the above-described specification specification command, and sets the setting value Vd received from the main control unit 20. Is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, “spec 1” has six stages of setting, and in this case, the main control unit 20 uses “0” to “5” as the set value Vd. “Spec 2” and “Spec 3” are two stages of setting and three stages of setting, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses “0”, “1”, and “0” to “3” as the set value Vd, respectively. “Spec 4” is “No setting”. In this case, “0” is stored as a conversion value for each set value Vd as shown in the figure.

With the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 performs the setting value conversion as described above, the processing load on the main control unit 20 can be reduced.

<7. Summary of Embodiment>

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine (1) according to the embodiment includes a control unit (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation and whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. There are provided setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting a set value indicating the stage of the winning probability, and storage means (ROM 202) in which data used by the control means for progress control is stored.
The storage unit stores a data table (for example, a set value offset conversion table in FIG. 16) including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set values. The first setting value related information which is the setting value related information selected when referring to the setting value which can be set by the means, and the setting value related information which is selected when the setting value which cannot be set by the setting means is referred to. Certain second set value related information, and contains, as the first set value related information, at least the specific information related to the set value indicating the stage with the lowest winning probability is stored, and the second set value related information The same information as the specific information is stored.

When the set value is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value stored in the RAM to a value representing the lowest step.
However, if the information is tampered with after rewriting, the corresponding information is obtained from the data table based on the unsettable setting value, and an operation corresponding to the unsettable setting value may be realized.
According to the above configuration, it is impossible to obtain information corresponding to the setting value that cannot be set from the data table, so that it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being established, and to improve the fairness of the game. Can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine according to the embodiment, 0 is stored as the specific information.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent establishment of an illegal act due to falsification of the set value by a simple method of writing the specific information = 0 in the set value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple method.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (1) according to the embodiment includes a control unit (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation and a determination as to whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. There are provided setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting a set value indicating a stage of the winning probability, and storage means (ROM 202) in which data used by the control means for progress control is stored.
The storage means includes a first data table (for example, a big hit determination random number determination table in FIG. 27) including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set values, and a lower layer than the first data table. A second data table (for example, the special symbol creation address table in FIG. 34) stored in the storage area on the side and not including the setting value related information, and the first data table is used for progress control. A used data storage area in which data is stored (for example, addresses "4093" to "4111") and an unused data storage area in which unused data not used for progress control are stored (for example, addresses "4113" to "4118") )).

If only the used data storage area is reserved in the first data table containing the setting value related information, when the number of setting values to be used (the number of stages) is to be increased, When such set value related information is added to the first data table, data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer needs to be shifted to the lower layer. In other words, data after the second data table is forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
If the number of set values to be used is increased by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table including the set value related information as described above, The setting value related information relating to the setting value of the minute can be stored in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it is not necessary to rewrite the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the load of the data rewriting operation caused by changing the number of setting values to be used.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the usage data storage area stores usage data of a capacity corresponding to the number of setting values that can be set by the setting means, and the unused data storage area includes the setting means. Unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of setting values that cannot be set is stored.

  Thereby, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure a capacity for storing the set value related information relating to the increased set value when the number of steps of the set value is increased. it can.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, 0 is stored as unused data.

  Thus, even if the first data table is referred to by the unused setting value Vd, it is possible to prevent the setting value related information corresponding to the unused setting value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being materialized, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (1) according to the embodiment includes a control unit (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation and a determination as to whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. There are provided setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting a set value indicating a stage of the winning probability, and storage means (ROM 202) in which data used by the control means for progress control is stored.
The storage means includes a first data table (for example, a set value offset conversion table in FIG. 16) including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set values, and a second data table including no set value related information. The second data table (for example, the special symbol creation address table of FIG. 34) is stored, and the storage means stores the first data table in a storage area lower than the second data table, and stores the first data table. The second data table is not stored in the storage area below the table (see FIG. 35).

Accordingly, when the number of set values to be used is increased, the contents of the first data table located at the lowest layer of the data area in the storage means need only be rewritten, and data in a lower layer than the first data table may be used. It is possible to make it unnecessary to rewrite the part.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the data rewriting operation caused by changing the number of setting values to be used.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment includes a main control unit (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation, and an effect control unit (effect control unit 24) for controlling the progress of the effect operation. The main control means includes setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting, based on a predetermined operation, a set value indicating a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player. Transmission means capable of transmitting predetermined information to the effect control means (for example, transmission processing of S705 or S809), and the setting means can set any one of N types of setting values, The transmitting means is capable of transmitting setting value information on the setting value set by the setting means to the effect control means.
The effect control means has an analyzing means (setting-related command processing: S2130e) capable of analyzing the setting value information received from the main control means, and the analyzing means is capable of analyzing M kinds of setting value information which is larger than N kinds. It is configured to be able to be analyzed.

Thereby, when the number of setting values to be used can be changed, the effect control means can analyze the setting value information up to the M-th stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the effect control means, even if the set value set by the setting means and the set value analysis information based on the set value information analyzed by the analysis means correspond, The configuration is such that a predetermined process can be executed even when not performed.

Thereby, when the number of steps of the set value can be changed, the effect control means can execute the process up to the M-th stage, and does not need to rewrite the program of the effect control means until the M-th stage. It becomes possible.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment includes a main control unit (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation, and an effect control unit (effect control unit 24) for controlling the progress of the effect operation. The main control means includes setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting, based on a predetermined operation, a set value indicating a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player. Transmission means capable of transmitting predetermined information to the effect control means (for example, transmission processing of S705 or S809), and the setting means can set any one of N types of setting values, The transmitting means is configured to be able to transmit setting value information relating to the setting value set by the setting means to the effect control means.
The effect control means has an analyzing means (setting-related command processing: S2130e) capable of analyzing the setting value information received from the main control means, and the analyzing means is capable of analyzing M kinds of setting value information which is larger than N kinds. It is configured to be able to be analyzed.
Then, the main control means can execute the first processing relating to the progress of the game operation based on the N kinds of set values, and the effect control means can control the effect operation based on the M kinds of set value information. The second process relating to the progress can be executed.

Thus, when the number of steps of the set value can be changed, the effect control means can execute the second process relating to the progress of the effect operation up to M steps. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the load of the program rewriting operation.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs symbol fluctuation display and controls the state to an advantageous state that is an advantageous state for the player, and determines a fluctuation pattern related to the symbol fluctuation. The determination means (the fluctuation pattern lottery process in FIG. 28) and the progress control of the game operation are performed, and a set value indicating a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player is set based on the operation. Possible setting means (main control unit 20) and effect means (effect control unit 24 and light display device 45a, sound generating device 46a, liquid crystal for executing an effect including a notice effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state) Display device 36).
Then, the notice effect includes a stage notice effect having a stage, and the staging means makes it possible to determine the stage of the step notice effect on the basis of the variation pattern, and the notice content of the step notice effect is based on the set value. It can be determined.

As for the setting suggestion using the stage announcement effect, if the stage of the stage announcement effect is determined based on the set value, the stage announcement effect becomes difficult to develop, and it is difficult to enhance the effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the stage announcement effect can be determined according to the fluctuation information, and the announcement content of the stage announcement effect can be determined based on the set value.
Thereby, in realizing the setting suggestion effect using the stage announcement effect, it is possible to prevent the stage announcement effect from becoming difficult to develop, and to enhance the effect.

<8. Other Modifications>

In the description so far, a pachinko game machine using a game ball as a game medium has been exemplified, but the game machine is not particularly limited as long as the game object can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine using a game medium having a shape other than a spherical shape as a game medium, a spinning-type game machine, or the like may be used.

  The information displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information illustrated in FIG. For example, a certain set value may indicate how long a game has been played. Specifically, the date and time and the time from when a certain set value is set to when it is changed next may be displayed. Further, the date and time from when the power is turned on to when the game is played with a certain set value and when the power is turned off may be displayed. Further, when the set value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time and time from when the set value is determined to be abnormal to when a normal set value is set may be displayed. Also, originally, the set value is not changed during the game or the set value does not change from the normal value to the abnormal value, but if the set value is changed despite the game due to noise or goto action May store the date and time and display it as a history display. Also, the number of times the RAM clear processing and the backup restoration processing have been performed and the date and time information may be displayed in a similar manner. Further, the timing for displaying the history display may be, for example, while the setting change processing is being performed, in addition to the time when the setting confirmation processing is being performed. Furthermore, a history display may be performed when a predetermined operation input is made even during a game.

  In the above description, an example has been given in which the history information is stored in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) in accordance with the occurrence of the target event of the history display, and the history information stored in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244. However, as the timing for storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244, the elapsed time stored in the internal work is referred to, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the history information is stored (copied) in the memory 244. Is also possible.

Further, even after the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is terminated in response to the termination instruction operation, if the display condition is being satisfied (eg, the setting is being confirmed (or the setting is being changed)), the display instruction is repeated. It can be displayed as many times as necessary. Alternatively, in a case where the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times, such as once, under a condition satisfying a predetermined display condition, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. Can be disabled.
It is desirable that the performance display monitor for displaying the base value is not displayed during the display of the history information. Further, the configuration may be such that the volume / light amount adjustment is effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the details of the adjustment on the display means.
Further, the contents and status of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal. In this case, it is desirable to display the performance display monitor at a position that does not overlap with the history information. In addition, the volume / light amount may not be adjusted. In this case, there is no possibility that the history information and the display overlap, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration is increased.

  It is also desirable not to execute at least the initialization operation of the movable body on the board side during the display of the history information. Thus, it is possible to prevent the movable body on the board side from moving to the front side of the display means and hindering the visibility of the display screen. Further, the initialization operation may not be performed for the movable body on the frame side. However, for the movable body on the frame side, if there is no possibility of obstructing the display screen, initialization may be performed. In this case, for example, the initialization operation of the vibration means mounted on the operation means or the air ejection means from which air is ejected may be performed. Thus, the initialization operation of the frame-side movable body can be completed first, so that after the display of the history information is completed, that is, after the setting confirmation process (or the setting change process) is completed, the board-side movable body is moved. It is efficient because it only needs to initialize the body. Alternatively, the initialization operation may be performed for all the movable bodies after the display of the history information is completed.

Further, when a setting value changing operation is performed in a state where the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the production control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 performs processing based on the changed setting value. On the other hand, since the effect control unit 24 cannot know the information, it cannot store and display it as history information. Therefore, change the setting value with the harness disconnected, turn off the power once, and then turn on the power with the harness connected again, without changing the setting value without leaving a trace of the setting value change. Can do it. To prevent this, at the time of power-on, the main control unit 20 transmits setting value information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 transmits the stored setting value information and the transmitted setting value information from the main control unit 20. If inconsistency arises by comparing the information with the set value, the error notification may be performed using a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like.
In this case, the effect control unit 24 may be set to a game stop state, and even if a command related to the game is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the processing based on the command is not performed. May be. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when performing the setting change process or the RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 determines that the setting change process has been normally performed again. Judge and store the newly determined set value, and suspend / stop error notification (Contradiction ⇒ Error notification ⇒ Power off ⇒ Setting change (Non-error notification) ⇒ Setting change completed (Non-error notification)) You may make it. In addition, when the power is turned on for the first time, the effect control unit 24 side has no information on the set value. In such a case, when the information of the set value is transmitted from the main control unit 20, It is desirable to configure so that error notification is not performed.

1, 1A Pachinko machine 13 Direction button 16 Cross key 20 Main control board (main control section)
201 CPU
202 ROM
203 RAM
24 Production control board (production control unit)
241 CPU
242 ROM
243 RAM
36 liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b special symbol display device 40 liquid crystal control unit 45 decorative lamp 45a optical display device 46 speaker 46a sound generator 61 front door open sensor 94 setting key switch 97 setting / performance display 98 RAM clear switch Gs setting history confirmation screen

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game operation;
Effect control means for controlling the progress of the effect operation,
The main control means includes:
Based on a predetermined operation, setting means capable of setting a set value representing a stage of a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player,
Transmission means capable of transmitting predetermined information to the effect control means,
The setting means,
It is possible to set any one of the set values from among N types,
The transmitting means,
The setting value information on the setting value set by the setting means, is configured to be able to be transmitted to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
An analysis unit that can analyze the setting value information received from the main control unit,
The analysis means,
It is configured to be able to analyze M kinds of the set value information more than the N kinds,
The main control means includes:
It is possible to execute a first process relating to the progress of the game operation based on the N kinds of the set values,
The effect control means,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second process relating to the progress of the effect operation based on the M kinds of the set value information.

Images